252938358-01 T1

SAGEM FMX
64 and n x 64 kbit/s
Digital Cross-Connect Multiplexer
FMX
P4.4 RELEASE
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM - No 252 938 358-A - Volume 1
April 2007 Issue
Sagem Communication closely follows all technological changes and is continually striving to
improve its products for the benefit of its customers. It therefore reserves the right to change its
documentation accordingly without notice.
Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-1
FOREWORD
The information contained in this manual is subject to change due to technical evolutions.
Sagem Communication reserves the right to change the specifications of its products to
incorporate design improvements.
This Technical Manual deals with the FMX Digital Cross-connect and Multiplexer. It describes
all FMX equipment that can be installed in FMX12, P3 Subscriber or FMX4 shelves.
The exact composition of the FMX System is a defined in each contract.
The wires colour is indicated by a code only on the cables described in figures of the chapter
3. These cables are equipped with a connector at an end and wired outputs at the other end.
This code is compliant with NF C 04-21 french standard requiments and detailed in the table
below.
Colour
Literal Code
BlacK BK
BrowN BN
ReD RD
OranGe OG
YEllow YE
GreeN GN
BlUe / Light Blue BU
VioleT VT
GreY GY
WHite WH
PinK PK
GolD GD
TurQuoise TQ
SilveR SR
GreeN and YEllow GNYE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-2
SECURITY FOREWORD
SUBRACK
SAFETY ITEM
FMX12 P3 Subscriber FMX4
Ground X X X
Equipment conformity depends on connection of the
protective earth terminal ( ) of the subrack to a sound
earthing.
Port safety level X X X
The ports are connected by means of L907 type Belden
cables
The port safety level is given in tables 1.1 and 1.2 in section
1, volume 1 of this technical manual.
- - X
The safety level of the mains voltage is DPV (Dangerous
Primary Voltage) or OV (Over Voltage)
Authorized personnel X X X
These sub-racks should only be installed by authorized
personnel.
Fire shield X - X
The sub-rack casing acts as a fire shield.
- X -
P3 Subscriber sub-racks should only be installed in
cabinets, bays or racks with a bottom section that is sealed
or else equipped with a V1 or HF1 class air filter (minimum),
or which is situated on a none-flammable surface.
Connection to an IT network X X X
These sub-racks should not be connected to an IT electrical
installation (independent neutral power supply).
Phase and neutral mains
protection
- - X
Protection against phase-to-neutral-to-ground short-circuits
and leaks provided by the electrical installation (16 A and
differential protection).
This equipment should only be connected to the power
supply using the specially provided cable, or any equivalent
cable that conforms with harmonized standards and
documentation.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-3
E 2002/96/CE DIRECTIVE
ENVIRONMENT
Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential
concern of Sagem Communication.
Sagem Communications aim is to operate systems safeguarding the environment and
consequently it has decided to integrate environmental performance considerations in the life
cycle of its products, from manufacturing to commissioning, use and disposal.
PACKAGING
The presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to
an approved national organization to improve packaging recovery and
recycling infrastructures.
To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this
kind of waste.
BATTERIES
If your product contains batteries, they must be disposed of at appropriate
collection points.
THE PRODUCT
The crossed-out waste bin marked on the product or its accessories
means that the product belongs to the family of electrical and electronic
equipment.
In this respect, the European regulations require you to dispose of it
selectively:
At sales points on purchasing similar equipment,
At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off center,
selective collection, etc.).
In this way, you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of Electrical Electronic Equipment
Waste, which can have an effect on the environment and health.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-4
MANUAL CHANGE LIST
(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition)
No. Issue
(No., date)
Change
Description
Changed
Pages
(volume 2)
01 February
2007
Creation of the Manual (Volumes 1 and 2) with the
reference 288 110 880-01
All pages
April 2007 Change of the Manual reference replaced by:
Material Reference 252938358-A
Document Reference 3000287747 R11 000 01
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ?
This Technical Manual comprises four volumes.
Volume 1 contains information relative to the entire equipment:
Section 1: System overview and specifications
Section 2: Equipment description: (shelf and common equipment units) and available
configurations
Section 3: Installation and operation of equipment shelves and common sub-assemblies.
Equipment operations: description of operator features.
Section 4: Maintenance: fault locating and restoral of operational condition through
sub-assembly replacement.
Volume 2 contain information relative to optional sub-assemblies (Port Cards...): hardware
description and functional description, start-up and operation, on a per card basis (each card is
dealt with in an individual section). Use of this information depends on the exact equipment
configuration in use.
For easier use of this Technical Manual, Volume 1 contains all preliminary pages describing the
organization of the Technical Manual (content pages and foreword) and a glossary of
abbreviations.
Volume 3 contain information relative to the 600 B software User Manuel
(part number: N5682000901) that is attached to the FMX Manual. Indeed, the Intelligent Access
Device Board (IADB) is a concentrator/multiplexer, X25 bridge/router and Frame Relay that
uses the MEGAPAC standard software.
This manual allows to the user to learn the fundamentals of how the Megapac multiprotocol
PABX operates and all the more reason for the IADB card.
Volume 4 contain information relative to the User Guide of the Ethernet card (ETH) of the FMX
(part number: 288 068 797-xx).
NOTE: The User's Manual part number is 252 938 382-x where x represents the
edition number.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-6
PAGE INDEX
Pages
VOLUME 1
FOREWORD/SECURITY FOREWORD 0-1 and 0-2
E 2002/96/EC DIRECTIVE 0-3
MANUALCHANGE LIST 0-4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ? 0-5
PAGE INDEX (VOLUME 1 AND VOLUME 2) 0-6 and 0-7
CONTENTS (VOLUME 1) 0-8 to 0-10
LIST OF FIGURES 0-11 to 0-13
LIST OF TABLES 0-14 and 0-15
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 0-16 to 0-18
SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1-1 to 1-56
SECTION 2 - DESCRIPTION 2-1 to 2-16
SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION AND OPERATION 3-1 to 3-234
SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE 4-1 to 4-20
GLOSSARY G-1 to G-6
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-7
Pages
VOLUME 2
MANUAL CHANGE LIST 0-1
PAGE INDEX 0-5 and 0-6
SECTION 1 - 2MU CARD 1-1 to 1-4
SECTION 2 - A2S CARD 2-1 to 2-58
SECTION 3 - V.24/V.11 CARD 3-1 to 3-52
SECTION 4 - V.24/V.28 CARD 4-1 to 4-40
SECTION 5 - 3 64 I CARD 5-1 to 5-24
SECTION 6 - 6PAFC CARD 6-1 to 6-18
SECTION 7 - 2w2B1Q CARD 7-1 to 7-56
SECTION 8 - BBTxRx CARD 8-1 to 8-4
SECTION 9 - 4U TRANSFIX CARD 9-1 to 9-44
SECTION 10 - 6-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCHAN) 10-1 to 10-24
SECTION 11 - SUBSCRIBER CARD 11-1 to 11-28
SECTION 12 - 12-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCH12) 12-1 to 12-22
SECTION 13 - CONFERENCE CARD (CONF) 13-1 to 13-36
SECTION 14 - INTELLIGENT ACCESS DEVICE BOARD (IADB) 14-1 to 14-12
SECTION 15 - ADPCM BOARD (ADPCM) 15-1 to 15-18
SECTION 16 - 4 Asynchronous ports Card (4VAS) 16-1 to 16-24
SECTION 17 - Ethernet (ETH) CARD 17-1 to 17-8
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-8
CONTENTS
Pages
FOREWORD/SECURITY FOREWORD 0-1
E 2002/96/EC DIRECTIVE 0-3
LIST OF CHANGES 0-5
PAGE INDEX (VOLUME 1 AND VOLUME 2) 0-6
CONTENTS (VOLUME 1) 0-8
LIST OF FIGURES 0-11
LIST OF TABLES 0-15
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 0-17
SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1-1
1.1 Overview 1-3
1.2 Functional Description 1-4
1.2.1 Common Equipment Units Functions 1-5
1.2.2 Port Cards 1-22
1.3 Equipment Composition 1-30
1.4 Specifications 1-31
1.4.1 System Specifications 1-31
1.4.2 2MU Card Specifications 1-37
1.4.3 A2S Card Specifications 1-37
1.4.4 V.24/V.11 Card Specifications 1-38
1.4.5 V.24/V.28 Card Specifications 1-39
1.4.6 4VAS Card Specifications 1-39
1.4.7 3 64 I Card Specifications 1-40
1.4.8 6PAFC Card Specifications 1-41
1.4.9 2w2B1Q Card Specifications 1-42
1.4.10 BBTxRx Card Specifications 1-43
1.4.11 Subscr Card Specifications 1-44
1.4.12 Exchan Card Specifications 1-45
1.4.13 Exch12 Card Specifications 1-46
1.4.14 4U Transfix Card Characteristics 1-46
1.4.15 CONF Card Characteristics 1-47
1.4.16 IADB Card Characteristics 1-47
1.4.17 ETH Card Characteristics 1-48
1.4.18 ADPCM Card Characteristics 1-48
1.4.19 GIE Card Battery Specifications 1-48
1.4.20 GIE P Card Battery Specifications 1-49
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-9
1.5 Reminder of the Frame Structure 1-50
1.5.1 2 Mbps Frame (to ITU-T recommendation G.704) 1-50
1.5.2 64 I + Signaling Frame 1-52
1.5.3 72-144-288 kbps BBTxRx Frame 1-53
1.5.4 U Frames 1-54
SECTION 2 - DESCRIPTION 2-1
2.1 Rear Connection Shelf Description (P3 Subscriber Shelf) 2-3
2.2 Front Connection Shelf Description (FMX12 shelf) 2-5
2.3 Rear Connection Shelf Description (FMX4 shelf) 2-7
2.4 Sub-set Description 2-9
2.4.1 + 5 V/11 A, - 5 V/2 A, +53 V/0,8 A, -53 V/1,6 A Power Converter (P3) 2-9
2.4.2 110/230 V mains supply 2-11
2.4.3 -48 V battery connector 2-11
2.4.4 Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE or GIE P) 2-13
2.4.5 Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card (COB and COB-B) 2-15
2.5 Configurations 2-16
2.5.1 Shelf Mode of Operation 2-16
2.5.2 Card Combination in Shelves 2-16
SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION - START-UP AND OPERATION 3-1
3.1 Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX12 Shelf) 3-5
3.1.1 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation 3-5
3.1.2 Power Distribution and Supply 3-9
3.1.3 Connection Description 3-15
3.2 Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX9-S Shelf) 3-63
3.3 Rear-connection Shelf (FMX4 Shelf) Installation 3-127
3.3.1 Power supply Installation 3-127
3.4 Start-up and Configuration 3-190
3.4.1 Shelf Power-up 3-191
3.4.2 Card Configuration 3-192
3.4.3 Setting Up the Cards 3-198
3.4.4 External Connections 3-199
3.4.5 Card Power-up 3-199
3.4.6 Operation 3-200
3.5 Particular Operating Functions 3-206
3.5.1 Connection Function 3-206
3.5.2 Synchronization 3-208
3.5.3 Codes to be Inserted in the TSs 3-209
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-10
3.5.4 Performance Management 3-210
3.5.5 Error and Fault Management 3-214
3.5.6 Environment Loop Processing 3-216
3.5.7 Events Memory 3-217
3.5.8 CT Interface 3-217
3.6 Evolution 3-218
3.6.1 Adding a Port Card 3-218
3.6.2 Modification of a Port Card without Removing it from the Shelf 3-219
3.6.3 Port Card Removal 3-219
3.6.4 GIE-S Card Downloading 3-219
SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE 4-1
4.1 Preventive Maintenance 4-3
4.2 Corrective Maintenance 4-4
4.2.1 Principle 4-4
4.2.2 Maintenance Facilities 4-5
4.2.3 Fault or Error Locating 4-8
4.2.4 Card Replacement Procedure 4-16
GLOSSARY G-1
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-11
LISTE OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1 - FMX System Applications ...................................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1.2 - Functional Organization ........................................................................................................1-23
Figure 2.1 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX12 shelf) ................................................................ 2-2
Figure 2.2 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX9-S shelf)............................................................... 2-4
Figure 2.3 - Front view of the rear connection shelf (FMX4 shelf) ............................................................. 2-6
Figure 2.4 - Power Converter Card Front Panel ........................................................................................ 2-8
Figure 2.5 - 48 V battery converter unit ....................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2.6 - GIE-S Card Front Panels ......................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2.7 - COB and COB-B Card Front Panels.....................................................................................2-14
Figure 3.1 - FMX 12 Shelf - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19 or ETSI Rack ............................................. 3-4
Figure 3.2 - FMX 12 shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf ..................................... 3-6
Figure 3.3 - Station Power Distribution Principle ....................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.4 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves ...............3-10
Figure 3.5 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves) ................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3.6 - Power Cable equipped with one 7-way Connector (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves) ................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3.7 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 .......................3-12
Figure 3.8 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable..................................................................................3-13
Figure 3.9 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) ..................................................................................3-13
Figure 3.10 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX 12 Shelf ......................................................3-14
Figure 3.11 - Connection cable for BBTxRx and A2MEcards (Standard Plan).........................................3-21
Figure 3.12 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan) ...........................................................3-23
Figure 3.13 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel).....................................................................................3-24
Figure 3.14 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels) ...................................................................................3-25
Figure 3.15 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan) ........................3-26
Figure 3.16 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan) ..........................................................3-27
Figure 3.17 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan)..............................................................3-28
Figure 3.18 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 or 4VAS Card Connection.................................................3-29
Figure 3.19 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card........................................................3-30
Figure 3.20 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card ......................................................3-31
Figure 3.22 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card.......................................................3-33
Figure 3.23 - 1/2 cable for 1 interface connection of the 4VAS card ........................................................3-34
Figure 3.24 - 1/2 cable for 4 interfaces connection of the 4VAS card.......................................................3-35
Figure 3.25 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection ....................................................................3-36
Figure 3.26 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card .........................................................3-37
Figure 3.27 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection..................................................................3-38
Figure 3.28 - RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) ...............................................................................3-39
Figure 3.29 - ETH Card A2S card Connection Cable for 1x2 Mbit/s ports.......................................3-40
Figure 3.31 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan) ...........................................................3-42
Figure 3.32 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan) ......................................3-43
Figure 3.33 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan) .............................................................3-46
Figure 3.34 - Local CT Connection Cable ................................................................................................3-49
Figure 3.35 - CT Connection Cable via Modem.......................................................................................3-51
Figure 3.36 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection .................................................................3-52
Figure 3.37 - P2 Management Interface Cable with standard end............................................................3-53
Figure 3.38 - Cable for P1 Management Interface connection .................................................................3-54
Figure 3.39 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end ............................................................3-55
Figure 3.40 - 26-way RJ45 Adapter (TNM Ethernet Access)....................................................................3-57
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-12
Figure 3.41 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) ...........................................................3-59
Figure 3.42 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) ...........................................3-60
Figure 3.43 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) ........................................3-61
Figure 3.44 - Front panel of the FMX9-S Shelf.........................................................................................3-62
Figure 3.45 - FMX9-S shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf ..................................3-64
Figure 3.46 - Station Power Distribution Principle ....................................................................................3-66
Figure 3.47 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves .............3-68
Figure 3.48 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves)..............................................................................................3-69
Figure 3.49 - Power Cable equipped with one 7-way Connector (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves)..............................................................................................3-69
Figure 3.50 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 .....................3-70
Figure 3.51 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable................................................................................3-71
Figure 3.52 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) ................................................................................3-71
Figure 3.53 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX9-S Shelf......................................................3-72
Figure 3.54 - Connection cable for BBTxRx and A2MEcards (Standard Plan).........................................3-80
Figure 3.55 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan) ...........................................................3-82
Figure 3.56 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel).....................................................................................3-83
Figure 3.57 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels) ...................................................................................3-84
Figure 3.58 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan) ........................3-85
Figure 3.59 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan) ..........................................................3-86
Figure 3.60 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan)..............................................................3-87
Figure 3.61 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 or 4VAS Card Connection.................................................3-88
Figure 3.63 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card ......................................................3-90
Figure 3.65 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card.......................................................3-92
Figure 3.66 - 1/2 cable for 1 interface connection of the 4VAS card ........................................................3-93
Figure 3.67 - 1/2 cable for 4 interfaces connection of the 4VAS card.......................................................3-94
Figure 3.68 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection ....................................................................3-95
Figure 3.69 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card .........................................................3-96
Figure 3.70 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection..................................................................3-97
Figure 3.71 - RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) ...............................................................................3-98
Figure 3.73 - ETH Card A2S card Connection Cable for 4x2 Mbit/s ports.....................................3-100
Figure 3.74 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan) .........................................................3-101
Figure 3.75 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan) ....................................3-102
Figure 3.76 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan) ...........................................................3-105
Figure 3.77 - Local CT Connection Cable ..............................................................................................3-108
Figure 3.78 - CT Connection Cable via Modem.....................................................................................3-110
Figure 3.79 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection ...............................................................3-111
Figure 3.80 - P2 Management Interface Cable with standard end..........................................................3-112
Figure 3.81 - Cable for P1 Management Interface connection ...............................................................3-113
Figure 3.82 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end ..........................................................3-114
Figure 3.83 - 26-way RJ45 Adapter (TNM Ethernet Access)..................................................................3-116
Figure 3.84 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) .........................................................3-118
Figure 3.85 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) .........................................3-119
Figure 3.86 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) ......................................3-120
Figure 3.87 - Cordon d'alarmes SHDSL pour FMX9-SP ........................................................................3-125
Figure 3.88 - -48V Battery Converter Mounting and Connection............................................................3-126
Figure 3.89 - FMX 4 - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19"Rack..................................................................3-128
Figure 3.90 - FMX 4 - 19" or ETSI Rack-mounting shelf ........................................................................3-130
Figure 3.91 - Station Power Distribution Principle ..................................................................................3-132
Figure 3.92 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Rack-mounting shelf equipped with
a -48V Battery Converter .................................................................................................3-134
Figure 3.93 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves)............................................................................................3-135
Figure 3.94 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and
19" Rack-mounting Shelves)............................................................................................3-135
Figure 3.95 - ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution (PAPA G2 or PAPE G2) ...........................3-136
Figure 3.96 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable..............................................................................3-137
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-13
Figure 3.97 -"Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) ...............................................................................3-137
Figure 3.98 -Connection Location - Rear Connection FMX4 Shelf .........................................................3-138
Figure 3.99 - Cable for connecting BBTxRx Card (Standard Plan) ........................................................3-149
Figure 3.100 - Cable for connecting A2S Card (Standard Plan).............................................................3-151
Figure 3.101 - 75 ohms adapter cable....................................................................................................3-152
Figure 3.102 - 75 ohms adapter cable....................................................................................................3-153
Figure 3.103 -120 ohms adapter ............................................................................................................3-154
Figure 3.104 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan) ...................3-155
Figure 3.105 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan) ..........................................................3-156
Figure 3.106 - V24/V28 adapter for DTE Connection.............................................................................3-157
Figure 3.107 - V24/V28 adapter for DCE Connection ............................................................................3-158
Figure 3.108 - Extension cable for adaptater (straight cable) .................................................................3-159
Figure 3.109 - 1/2 cable for the interface connection of 4VAS card .......................................................3-160
Figure 3.110 - V25/V11 adapter (ISO 2110 connector) ..........................................................................3-161
Figure 3.111 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection..................................................3-162
Figure 3.112 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (V35) Card Connection........................................................3-163
Figure 3.113 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection................................................3-164
Figure 3.114 - 3-V35 port adapter ..........................................................................................................3-165
Figure 3.115 - RJ45 25-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) ...........................................................................3-166
Figure 3.116 - ETH card A2S card connection cable for 1x2 Mbit/s port ........................................3-167
Figure 3.117 - ETH card A2S card connection cable for 4x2 Mbit/s ports ......................................3-168
Figure 3.118 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan) .......................................................3-169
Figure 3.119 - Cable for Subscr and Exchan Cards Connection (Standard Plan) ..................................3-170
Figure 3.120 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan) .........................................................3-172
Figure 3.121 - Local CT Connection Cable in GIE-S Front Panel ..........................................................3-176
Figure 3.122 - Local CT Connection Cable on Shelf Rear Panel ...........................................................3-177
Figure 3.123 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) .......................................................3-180
Figure 3.124 - Two-shelf synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)........................................3-181
Figure 3.125 - 25-way RJ45 Adapter (TNM Ethernet Access)................................................................3-183
Figure 3.126 - Cable for P1 Management Interface connection .............................................................3-185
Figure 3.127 - P1 Management Interface Cable with standard end........................................................3-186
Figure 3.128 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection .............................................................3-187
Figure 3.129 - P2 Management Interface cable with standard end ........................................................3-188
Figure 3.130 - Card Layout in the FMX12 Shelf .....................................................................................3-196
Figure 3.131 - Card Layout in the FMX9-S and FMX4 Shelves..............................................................3-197
Figure 3.132 - Connection Function .......................................................................................................3-207
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-14
LISTE OF TABLES
Table 1.1 - FMX System Interfaces (1/2)..................................................................................................1-27
Table 1.2 - FMX System Interfaces (2/2)..................................................................................................1-28
Table 1.3 - Spare Bit Allocations in Odd-numbered Frame TS 0s............................................................1-50
Table 1.4 - TS16 Bit Allocations ...............................................................................................................1-51
Table 3.1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit...................................................................... 3-5
Table 3.2 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter .......................................................................................... 3-9
Table 3.3 - Slot/Connector Association ....................................................................................................3-15
Table 3.4 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB and ETH Cards.....................................................................................3-17
Table 3.5 - V24/V11, V24/V28 and 4VAS Cards ......................................................................................3-18
Table 3.6 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards........................................................................................3-19
Table 3.7 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX.................................................................3-20
Table 3.8 - J108 Connector, Alarm Loops................................................................................................3-44
Table 3.9 - GIE or GIE P Card - J1 Connector .........................................................................................3-48
Table 3.10 - Connector J122, "TPI/P2" Interface......................................................................................3-50
Table 3.11 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface...................................3-56
Table 3.12 - Connector J115, Synchronization, SEM, Line Test Bus Ports..............................................3-58
Table 3.13 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit...................................................................3-63
Table 3.14 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter .......................................................................................3-67
Table 3.15 - Slot/Connector Association ..................................................................................................3-74
Table 3.16 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB and ETH Cards...................................................................................3-76
Table 3.17 - V24/V11, V24/V28 and 4VAS Cards ....................................................................................3-77
Table 3.18 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards......................................................................................3-78
Table 3.19 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX...............................................................3-79
Table 3.20 - J108 Connector, Alarm Loops............................................................................................3-103
Table 3.21 - GIE or GIE P Card - J1 Connector .....................................................................................3-107
Table 3.22 - Connector J122, "TPI/P2" Interface....................................................................................3-109
Table 3.23 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface.................................3-115
Table 3.24 - Connector J115, Synchronization.......................................................................................3-117
Table 3.25 - SHDSL lines Connection....................................................................................................3-121
Table 3.26 - 2 Mbit/s SHDSL Connection...............................................................................................3-122
Table3.27 - SDSL alarms connection.....................................................................................................3-123
Table3.28 - SHDSL Operation Interface.................................................................................................3-123
Table 3.29 - Connector J101, -48V Battery Converter ...........................................................................3-127
Table 3.30 - 19"or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit ...................................................................3-129
Table 3.31 - Slot/Connector Association ................................................................................................3-139
Table 3.32 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
2w2B1Q, SubScr and Exchan Cards...............................................................................3-140
Table 3.33 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS,
IADB and ETH Cards.......................................................................................................3-142
Table 3.34 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards.................................................................3-143
Table 3.35 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS,
Table 3.36 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
Table 3.37 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS,
Table 3.38 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-15
Table 3.39 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS,
Table 3.40 - J601 Connector, Alarm Loops............................................................................................3-171
Table 3.41 - Connectors J1 on GIE-S Front Panel and J502 ("CT Interface") on Shelf Rear Panel ......3-175
Table 3.42 - Connector J501, "CT/ Modem" interface............................................................................3-178
Table 3.43 - Connector J504, Synchronization.......................................................................................3-179
Table 3.44 - Connector J602, TNM Interface .........................................................................................3-182
Table 3.45 - Connectors J603 and J604, TNM Interface........................................................................3-184
Table 3.46 - Connector J1 and J2, Secondary Power Supply Ports Interface ........................................3-189
Table 3.47 - GIE-S Card Link and Switch Options .................................................................................3-193
Table 3.48 - COB-B card link option.......................................................................................................3-195
Table 3.49 - Start-up Test ......................................................................................................................3-205
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-16
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
2W/4W : 2-wire/4-wire
ADPCM : Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
AF : Audio Frequency
AIS : Alarm Indication Signal
AISrem : Remote Alarm Indication Signal
BBTxRx : Baseband Tx/Rx Card
BER : Bit Error Rate
BER/ FAW : High Frame Alignment Word BER
CE : (Data) Collection Equipment
CEU : Common Equipment Unit
Clk Fail : Clock Signal Failure
COB : Conections, timing Circuit and Synchronisation card
CONFB : CONFERENCE Card
CRC : Cyclic Redundancy Check
DCE : Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DM : Degraded Minute
DTE : Data Terminal Equipment
EA, EB : E-wire A, E-wire B
EMC : Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
ES : Errored Second
ETH : Ethernet
FA : Frame Alignment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-17
FAL : Frame Alignment Loss
FAW : Frame Alignment Word
Flt Ind : Fault Indication
GIE (GIE P) : Management and Auxiliary Interface card
GSF : General Synchronization Failure (Jitter Reducer Unlock)
GTR : (Gestion Technique du Rseau) FRANCE TELECOM network
management alarms
HDB3 : High Density Bipolar 3
HHT : Hand-Held Terminal
IADB : Intelligent Access Device Board
IC : Input Channel
Int Clk : Internal Clock
LO : Local Oscillator
L S Fail : Line Signal Failure
Loop : Loopback
MA, MB : M-wire A, M-wire B
MFAW : MultiFrame Alignment Word
MM : Machine-Machine (Interface)
MMC : Man-Machine Communications
PABX : Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PC : Personal Computer
PCM : Pulse Code Modulation
PWR Fail : Power Supply Failure
Rem Fail : Remote Failure
SbMux : Subscriber Multiplexer
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 0-18
SELV : Safety Extra Low Voltage
SEM : (Surveillance Et Maintenance): FRANCE TELECOM Monitoring and
maintenance protocol
SES : Severely Errored Second
SIG : Signalling
SRC : Supervisory Redundancy Check
StMux : Station Multiplexer
TNV : Telecommunications Network Voltage
TS : Time Slot
UP : Unavailability Period
Vref : Reference Voltage
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-1
SECTION 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-2
F
M
X
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
2
B
1
Q

(
2
B

+

D
)
2
.
0
4
8

M
b
p
s
M
o
b
i
l
e

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
P
A
B
X
A
F
+
E
&
M
Z
2
.
0
4
8

M
b
p
s
V
O
I
C
E
A
n
a
l
o
g
P
A
B
X
V
2
4
/
V
2
8
2
.
0
4
8

M
b
p
s
C
h
a
n
n
e
l

A
s
s
o
c
i
a
t
e
d
S
i
g
n
a
l
i
n
g

o
r

I
S
D
N

D
i
g
i
t
a
l

P
A
B
X
V
2
4
/
V
1
1
N
e
t
w
o
r
k

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
C
e
n
t
e
r
D
A
T
A
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
b
e
r

D
a
t
a
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n

U
n
i
t
2
B
1
Q

(
2
B

+

D
)
2
B
1
Q

(
2
B

+

D
)
V
i
d
e
o
c
o
n
f
e
r
e
n
c
i
n
g
S
y
s
t
e
m
V
I
D
E
O
I
S
D
N
N
T
1
D
a
t
a
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
Figure 1.1 - FMX System Applications
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-3
1.1 Overview
Digital cross-connect systems are essential components of the modern transmission network
due to the conversion to fully digital transmission and the need for advanced services
integration. They must be capable of supporting, cross-connecting, inserting-removing and
distributing a wide range of information including:
- telephone or audiofrequency channels,
- low, medium or high bit rate data channels,
- 2048 kbps PCM channels,
- ISDN access channels (primary or basis access),
- access channels to Subscriber data transmission units for low, medium or high bit rate leased
line remoting.
The FMX is a Digital Cross-connect and Multiplexer System operating at 64 kbps and
n x 64 kbps which meets this need. It offers a wide variety of standard interfaces and provides a
wide range of terminals with access to public and private telecommunication networks and
meets these multiple requirements. With a flexible and modular structure, the FMX is easily
adaptable to any change of network configuration, by means of:
- the Craft Terminal (CT),
- or the Remote Management System (RMS),
used to modify port distribution via local or remote programming via or not others SAGEM
equipments.
FMX is a microprocessor-based equipment and offers standard card slots capable of housing
any port card, resulting in great operational flexibility.
FMX provides the capability of configuring transmission bit rate and circuit routing depending on
particular user needs, and of performing Time Slot (TS) allocation to maximize the use of
2048 kbps circuits. Where applicable, it processes Channel-Associated Signaling together with
data and the "Frame Relay" function for remote operation to other network equipment.
In addition to the high reliability offered by the redundancy of some Common Equipment Units
(CEU) (depending on equipment type), FMX provides network operations and maintenance
facilities including selecting the desired cross-connection map from those configured by the
operator, processing alarms, monitoring transmission performance, and controlling
maintenance operations.
FMX is well suited to the construction of many types of multi-services network. A number of
applications are schematically shown in Figure 1.1.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-4
1.2 Functional Description
FMX consists essentially of two types of units:
Common Equipment Units (CEU), included COB (or COB-B) and GIE-S
1
cards supporting
the functions used by the whole system:
multiplexing and cross-connect of data and the associated signaling,
internal messaging processing which allows centralized operation of port cards,
n x 8 or 64 kbps EOC cross-connect,
the generation of the "Frame Relay" function, which allows remote operation of other
network equipment (FMX, ETCD BMD or ETCD MVMD),
synchronization,
centralized equipment operation which includes:
- auxiliary functions including connection configuration, timeslot allocation, etc.,
- equipment maintenance (alarm management, self-test management, remote
loopback control),
- quality management which generates the 2 Mbps circuit error performance
parameters,
equipment remote operation via others SAGEM equipments,
port cards in variable numbers (1 to 12 according to equipment type) providing user
services connection; they provide access to standard interfaces mounted in standard card
slots:
2048 kbps ports,
3-64 kbps ports with 64 kbps signaling,
6 x AF ports with signaling (two E&M channels per AF channel),
6-2-wire telephone ports, of the subscriber or exchange type,
12-2-wire telephone ports, of the exchange type,
V.24/V.11 and V.24/V.28 data transmission ports,
72, 144, or 288 kbps Baseband Transmitter-Receiver ports,
2w2B1Q access for ISDN interfaces remoting (ISDN NT Connection) or digital
interfaces (Connection of S. units),
Furthermore, FMX takes up the following cards:
CONFERENCE card which permits, in linear networks, data distribution, data collection,
data distribution/collection and conference functions.
Intelligent Access Device Board (IADB)
2
card which realises the bridge, router functions
used the X25 and "Frame Relay" protocols. IADB card is not supervised by the FMX,
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) card which handles 32 or
16 kbit/s ADPCM code conversion.
Ethernet card (ETH) which realises the IP static router function.
FMX has been designed for use in a transmission network as a single or multiple output
multiplexer, or a digital cross-connect system.

1
If your shelf is equipped with a GIE or GIE-P card instead of a GIE-S card, please refer to Technical
Manual - No 288 057 918-03.
2
Concerning Configuration, Maintenance and Operation of the IADB, please refer to Technical
Manual - No 288 057 918-03.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-5
1.2.1 Common Equipment Units Functions
1.2.1.1 Data Transfer
The definition of the role of the FMX is dependent on the configuration of the connection
function of each card or port.
The "connection" function is defined:
at the port level for 2 Mbps interfaces,
and at the card level for other cases.
The "connection" function may have one of the following two conditions: multiplexed or cross-
connected.
When the "connection" function is multiplexed, the port or card retains its tributary or aggregate
function according to its type or mode when a connection is created.
When the "connection" is cross-connected, the tributary or aggregate function of the port or
card is irrelevant to connection creation.
Depending on card/port configuration, the FMX can behave as:
a connection network which allows the exchange of information between any two
interfaces,
a cross-connect; the FMX receiving at the subscriber end tributary datastreams
(channels) with which possible signaling and maintenance information is associated, and
forming a single datastream at 2048 kbps ("aggregate"),
a router; the FMX is a multiple output multiaggregate. At the subscriber end it receives
datastreams (or channels) ("tributary"), with which possible signaling and maintenance
information is associated. It forms one or more 2048 kbps datastreams ("aggregate").
Depending on card/port configuration, the FMX can combine these different modes of
operation.
Whatever the mode of operation selected on card/port configuration, data transmission is
performed in compliance with the allocation defined by the operator.
1.2.1.2 Signaling Transfer
The unit that processes signaling information manages the half-TS16s that carry Channel-
Associated Signaling, thereby allowing interchange of signaling information.
1.2.1.3 Synchronization
The FMX can be synchronized (synchronization possible from a nominal source and two
standby sources) to one of the following clocks:
one of the clocks at 2048 kpbs from the shelf slots in which the following cards are inserted:
a 2w2B1Q card with two ports (clock extracted from port in U network mode),
a 2048 kbps card (2MU),
or a 4-2048 kbps structured card (A2S),
NOTE: The A2S card which handles up to 4 PCM datastreams delivers only one of the 4
receive clocks at a given moment. The port selected as the synchronizing clock must
be "activated".
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-6
the external synchronization interface clock (2048 kHz 50 ppm), matched to 120 and
complying with ITU-T recommendation G.703,
internal clock timing controlled by a TCXO ( 5 ppm).
The cards delivering a synchronizing clock may be placed in any slot
The FMX operates with a nominal synchronization source and at most two standby sources
ranked in decreasing order of priority.
The FMX continuously generates a 2048 kHz frequency controlled by the active synchronization
source.
In normal operation, the active synchronization source is the nominal synchronization source
(the internal clock is used when no other declared source is available).
The internal clock cannot be selected as backup or nominal synchronization source. However,
synchronization may be forced to the internal clock (see CT user manual).
In the event of an active synchronization failure, the active synchronization is switched over to
the successive standby sources previously defined by the operator.
When the alarm having caused switching has been cleared, switching back to the higher level
source is performed in various modes:
after a three second time-out: : delayed automatic mode,
under control of the operator: : manual mode.
NOTE: Loopback triggering (LPP) is only managed as an alarm in manual mode.
Selection of the nominal synchronization source, the various standby sources, and the
restoration mode is performed via the corresponding configuration parameter options.
Furthermore, using the supervision and management system (CT or Remote Management
System (RMS)), the operator may set the synchronization from any one of the possible
synchronization sources including the internal clock. Synchronization setting is a maintenance
selection which inhibits the automatic synchronization controller:
faults linked to the set source are inhibited,
the equipment synchronizes itself from the internal clock and no alarm is activated when a
failure occurs on the set source,
the equipment is restored to automatic control with no timeout on the set source selected
when the fault disappears.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-7
1.2.1.4 Operation
The operation of the FMX is in accordance with the following architecture:
Terminals Connected by To a FMX
RMS (IONOS Manager)
IP local Network
or
CT software on PC
Modems
or
Direct connection by
cable
FMX (called "local")
FMX3 ("remote")
FMX4 ("remote")
FMX1 ("remote")
GIE-S
Management Network included Embedded Operating Channel (EOC)
FMX2 ("remote")
The operation of the FMX can be carried out:
by a PC equipped of the Craft Terminal (CT),
by a manager (for example: IONOS),
by both simultaneously.
The FMX to be operated can be an element of a group of FMX. This one can be operated some
is its position in the group. This topology is called "Management Network".
The connection of the Craft Terminal (CT) with the FMX can use:
an IP local network,
a couple of modems (Baseband, PSTN),
a direct connection by cable.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-8
1.2.1.5 CT Connection
The CT is a PC application used to manage FMX , BMD DCE or MVMD DCE type equipment
(SAGEM 2048-3MC).
The CT allows the operator to manage either:
the local FMX to which it is connected, via a modem where applicable,
or a far-end FMX BMD DCE or MVMD DCE belonging to the management network, via the
local FMX (the list of equipment configured on the management network is recovered by the
CT via a local FMX).
FMX operation is possible via the CT:
locally via a serial type point-to-point link (possibly remoted by modem).
NOTE: From the point of view of the FMX, the CT is called the local CT. From the point of
view of the CT, the equipment is called the local FMX.
or remotely via:
a frame relay connection (operation EOC channel transmitted in an 8 kbps circuit
using the TS0 bits of the odd frames of a 2 Mbps datastream or 64 kbps or operation
EOC channel carried by one of the TSs of a 2 Mbps aggregate or tributary interface)
set up between the local and remote FMX,
GIE-S card P1 and P2 management interfaces via others SAGEM equipments.
NOTE: From the point of view of the FMX, the CT is called the remote CT. From the point of
view of the CT, the equipment is called the remote FMX.
Local CT
The CT is connected via 8-way RJ45 connector located on the front panel of the GIE-S card
(V.24/V.28 type F interface) or on the rear of the shelf, depending on the shelf type.
Shelf FMX12 or FMX9-S FMX4
Local connection
Switch on Loc
connector of the front panel of
the GIE-S card.
connector of the front panel of
the GIE-S card or J502 connector
of the rear of the shelf.
The interface, operated in the asynchronous mode (DCE mode) at a bit rate of 9600 kbps (8
data bits, 1 stop bit, without parity) allows local operation to a FMX.
CT
(local)
F INTERFACE
FMX
(local)
GIE-S
CARD
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-9
Local CT (modem connection)
The CT is connected, by modem, to a connector on the connection panel (FMX12 or FMX9-S
shelf) or at the rear of the shelf (FMX4 shelf).
Remote CT Interface
Switch on Modem
J122 of the connection
panel
J501 of the shelf rear panel
The interface, operated in the asynchronous mode (DCE mode) at a bit rate of 9600 bps, allows
FMX remote operation.
CT
(local)
MODEM MODEM
FMX
(local)
GIE-S
Card
Remote CT (operation of a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT)
The CT is connected by a 8-way connector on the front of the GIE-S card (V24/V8 type F
interface) to the connection panel or the rear of the shelf, depending on the connection type
(local or remote) and shelf type used.
Local connection
Switch on Loc
connector of the
front of the GIE-S card
connector of the front
of the GIE-S card
or
J502 connector of the rear
of the shelf if a GIE-S card
is in the shelf
Remote connection
Switch on Modem
J122 of the connection
panel
J501 of the rear of the
shelf
The equipment operated by the CT is reached through the network of FMX:
Via a frame relay connection. The "Frame Relay" function carried out by the COB card is
used to operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT.
Via GIE-S card P1 and P2 management interfaces
The P1 and P2 management interfaces function, realized on the GIE-S card, is used to
operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT via others SAGEM equipments
which have P1 and P2 management interfaces.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-10
CT
(local)
FMX
(local)
Network of
FMXs
LOCAL Connection:
- DIRECT,
- via a MODEM
FMX
(Remote)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-11
Remote Management System (RMS IONOS) Connection
The Remote Management System (RMS IONOS) allows the operator to manage all
management network equipment.
For this, the RMS is connected:
- to a FMX located in network headend, via the IP local network, to "Ethernet" access of the
GIE-S card.
- via frame relay connections to other management network equipment units or GIE-S card P1
and P2 management interfaces via others SAGEM equipments.
The RMS is connected to a connector on the connection panel (FMX12 or FMX9-S shelves) or
on the shelf rear panel (FMX4 shelf).
RMS Interface J129 of the connection panel,
provided with an RJ45 adapter
J602 of the rear of the shelf,
provided with an RJ45 adapter
The connection port is 10/100BT Ethernet type. By configuration, the user can set the rate (10
or 100 MHz), the mode (half or full duplex), the type of cable (straight or crossed) or authorize
the rate negotiation. The two LEDs (link and data) corresponding to this interface are remoted
on the front panel of the GIE-S card.
IP Local
Network
FMX "Network Headend"
GIE-S
Card
Network of FMXs
IONOS
Server
IONOS
Client
The FMX "Network Headend" and all other equipments can be managed by the IONOS Server
and the IONOS clients.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-12
1.2.1.6 Structure of a network of FMXs
A FMX Management Network is a whole of FMX connected together, either via P1 and P2
interfaces, or via a protocol "Frame Relay" (FR) carried by the 2 Mbit/s links. This network is
constituted of the following elements:
1. A network Headend FMX
This FMX that connects to the Management System can be:
- A CT connected locally or remoted.
- A IONOS Management system, connected to "Ethernet" access of the GIE-S card via
IP local network.
2. If necessary, one or several FMX linked to the Headend FMX by P1/P2 interfaces.
3. Other FMX, linked by Frame Relay (FR), either to the Headend FMX, or at the one of FMX
linked to Headend FMX by P1/P2 interfaces.
The access path between the Management System and a network equipment takes the one of
ways following :
- Management System Headend FMX
- Management System Headend FMX (P1/P2 link) Remote FMX
- Management System Headend FMX (Frame Relay) Remote FMX
- Management System Headend FMX (P1/P2 link) (Frame Relay) Remote FMX
FMX FMX
FMX "Network Headend"
FMX
Frame Relay
Frame Relay
P2 P1 P2 P1
Frame Relay Frame Relay
P2
Note : The headend FMX is obligatorily equipped with a GIE-S card to be able to offer
connection to manager RMS IONOS via a IP local network. On the other hand, the
other FMX of the network can be with a preceding release (equipped with P4.3B
and/or P4.3C GIE-P cards).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-13
1.2.1.7 CT Operation
At the CT launching, the operator has access to a set of off-line controls which, among others,
allows a local configuration file (logic configuration) to be prepared for transmission to the FMX
during an operator session.
Network access opening, which may be protected by a password, provides operator access to
network equipment management functions and causes the link with the local equipment to be
set up. The CT switches to the receive mode for equipment continuous printout messages.
Setting up an operator session provides access to on-line equipment management control
orders.
The operator may program configuration data composing the logic configuration:
- general system parameters (name of FMX, date and time of equipment, equipment operation
(Sb Mux or St Mux), Ethernet configuration,
- physical description (description of shelf, cards and ports),
- description of connections, connection enable/disabling,
- description of particular connections (n x 4 kbps EOC, connection and frame relay mode
connections) implemented via the spare bits of the frame TS0 with no frame alignment (odd
frame TS0) and/or any TS of the 2 Mbps datastream,
- selecting idle codes added into data or signaling timeslots (unused TSs, inactive connections,
or temporary removal of a card),
- allocating alarms initiated by failure conditions detected on the various ports: major alarm,
minor alarm, no alarm, disabling or enabling alarms.
Note : When an alarm is masked, the corresponding notifications are filtered towards CT.
On the other hand those are always transmitted towards RMS (IONOS NMS). See
in the glossary, the definition of the Monitoring Status.
The operator may also:
- for each card or port (depending on type), define the connection function which may be
multiplexing (tributary or aggregate) or cross-connecting,
- selecting the nominal synchronization source, the successive standby sources and the restore
mode,
- where applicable, enter an "Administration" and/or "Monitoring" and/or "Operation" password,
- etc.
Moreover, the operator is provided with in-service access to the following information items at
any time:
- physical shelf configuration: occupied slots, types of card present, type of shelf,
- the physical description characteristics,
- alarm assignments and alarm disable/enable status,
- the characteristics of each connection,
- etc.
The operator may select a DCE DCM or MVMD DCE type equipment unit from the table of
management network equipment units of the local equipment. A HHT emulation screen allows
communication with the DCE DCM or MVMD DCE type equipment (transfers in asynchronous
mode at 1200 bps).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-14
Using a CT offers the following additional features:
- downloading a configuration stored on the CT,
- remotely saving configurations in file form on the CT,
- supervising FMX equipment FMX,
- managing "off-line" control orders.
RMS Operation
The RMS uses no password. All equipment services are accessible to the RMS once the
connection with the equipment is set up.
The RMS has priority over the CT to modify the equipment logic configuration and to perform
maintenance operations.
When the operator opens a local operation session on the CT, the FMX requests authorization
from the RMS. During this local operation phase, the FMX notifies the RMS of any change in
functional configuration occurring downstream.. When the local operator is disconnected, the
FMX informs the RMS.
All the parameters which can be modified using the CT can also be modified by the RMS.
NOTE: The reset function (logic configuration data erased except date and time) of the FMX
is only accessible via the local CT with the "Administration" password. For applications
not implementing protection via password, this function is inaccessible.
P1 and P2 Management Interfaces
The following configurations are available:
- P1 port (codirectionnal mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode),
- P1 port (contradirectionnal mode) + P2 port (contradirectionnal mode),
- P1 port (contradirectionnal mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode).
Passing from an operrating mode to another is made without equipment resetting.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-15
1.2.1.8 Availability
In the event of a power failure, data saving is possible for more than 300 hours thanks to a
battery. Equipment configuration is automatically reprogrammed (interface card and connection
description) once power is restored.
The operator has access to error and fault messages continuously on the manager (CT or
RMS).
Loopback may be applied to port cards either manually or remotely. The operator may read
access to current loopback status on the Man-Machine Interface.
Protection
The FMX offers the following protection options:
Power supply protection
All types of shelf, except the FMX4 shelf may be supplied from a protected power supply
consisting of two power converter cards which simultaneously supply the necessary power
for correct card operation via diode OR circuits.
Connection protection
1+1 type connection protection is provided by COB card redundancy. This duplicates all the
functions carried out by this card ("Frame Relay", cross-connect and timing circuit functions).
NOTE: The FMX4 shelf, which can only accommodate a single COB card, cannot have
this type of protection.
2 Mbit/s path protection
The 2 Mbit/s path protection function, performed by the A2S card, allows protection of a 2
Mbit/s link for a digital section by duplication of the 2 Mbit/s path between the two ends of the
section. This protection is of the "availability" type (for sudden path switching upon detection
of certain criteria, without preservation of the integrity of the binary elements).
Transmission Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring of 2048 kbps digital circuits is performed without disturbing traffic, and
is essential to achieving a high standard of quality of service.
Bit error rate (BER) monitoring is performed by the Cyclic Redundancy Check procedure
(CRC4) in accordance with the ITU-T recommendation G.704, to compute the following error
performance parameters according to the ITU-T M.2100 and ETSI ETS 300-461-2
recommendations: Errored Seconds (ES), Severely Errored Seconds (SES) and number of
residual errored blocks (Background Block Error, BBE).
The results of the above computations are accessible to the operator, on the CT or RMS.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-16
1.2.2 Port Cards
FMX can accept, depending on the type of shelf used, up to twelve port cards depending on
particular customer service applications and complying with applicable ITU-T recommendations
defining the electrical specifications of interfaces. The various types of port cards currently
available are listed in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2
Note: The common equipment units (CEU) are SELV.
1-2048 kbps Port Multiuse Card (2MU)
This card features an HDB3 interface complying with the ITU-T recommendations G.703 and
G.704, which may support a single bit rate link or a multiplex of N x 64 kbps channels.
Transmission performance monitoring is performed to supply common equipment units with
errored block (blocks are groups of 2048 bits at 2 Mbps) information. This procedure complies
with the ITU-T recommendation G.704.
Depending on the particular operating environment, the 2MU card may support the following
modes of operation:
- Aggregate operation: TRANSMIC 2 G and G.704/1920 kbps,
- Tributary operation: TRANSMIC 2 G, G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps,G.736 - G.732,
international G.732 and TRANSFIX.
4-2048 kbps Structured Port Card (A2S)
This card features an HDB3 interface complying with the ITU-T recommendations G.703 and
G.704, which may support a single bit rate link or a multiplex of N x 64 kbps channels.
Transmission performance monitoring is performed to supply common equipment units with
errored block (blocks are groups of 2048 bits at 2 Mbps) information. This procedure complies
with the ITU-T recommendation G.704.
Depending on the particular operating environment, the A2S card may support the following
modes of operation:
- Aggregate operation: TRANSMIC 2 G, G.704/1920 kbps and G.704/1984 kbps,
- Tributary operation: TRANSMIC 2 G, G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps, G.732,
international G.732, TRANSFIX, G.732 with virtual interfaces
(IV), G.736 with IV, international G.732 with IV, I431 and
transparent TS0.
The A2S card offers, in addition:
- the Virtual Interface function which allows to connected several N x 64 kbps links of various
originations but with a single destination on a 2 Mbps circuit,
- 2 Mbit/s path availability protection.
3-V.24/V.11(V.10) Port Card (V24/V11)
The Card supports three separate standard DCE interfaces. It offers bit rates of 48, 56, and n x
64 kbps (1n31) depending on the 3 x 512 or 3 x 1984 kbps on card internal datastreams
parameter. The interface may be operated in V.24/V.11(V10) mode or in X.24/V.11 mode, with
or without interchange control signals.
The V.24/V11 card may be plugged into the 12 multipurpose slots of the G2,FMX12 and P3
Subscriber shelves and in the 4 multipurpose slots of the FMX4 shelves.
The Card offers V.35 DTE compatibility.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-17
3-64 Interface Card (3 64 I)
This card provides connection of three co-directional J64 interfaces complying with ITU-T
recommendation G.703.
A transmission pair and a receive pair which can carry 64 kbps signaling synchronized with
data are associated with the three 64 data interfaces.
6-Programmable Audio Frequency Channel Card (6PAFC)
The card supports six separate analog interfaces available for 2-wire or 4-wire operation, with
two associated E&M channels on each interface.
2-2-wire 2B1Q Port Card (2w2B1Q)
The card supports two separate 2B1Q interfaces. Depending on the implementation, this card
may support either ISDN mode or TRANSMIC extensions.
NOTE: It is recommended to use a COB card equipped with a TCXO.
ISDN mode operation
When configured in subscriber mode, it provides connection to two 2-wire ISDN Network
Termination Units (NT1s) using 2B1Q line code. When configured in network mode, it interfaces
with two 2-wire 2B1Q Line Termination Modules on a ISDN PABX. It contains interface circuits,
and remote power feed circuits or remote power feed detection circuits, in the subscriber mode
and network mode, respectively.
NOTE: remote power feed switch on/off is available.
In addition to remote subscriber connections through an ISDN, the Card also provides
connection to remote Transmitter-Receiver Base Stations (BSs) used in the SAT TANGARA
Digital Cordless Telephone System. In this case, the Card fitted at the exchange (Base Station
Controller: BSC) recovers the clock on the 2B1Q interface.
TRANSMIC Extension Mode of Operation
The 2w2B1Q card provides connection S. unit to the FMX via a line using the 2B1Q coding U
interfaces on which a repeater may be inserted.
The use of a S. unit allows the remoting of low, medium and high bit rate units of the
V24/V11(V10), X24/V11, V.35 or V24/V28 type; the S. unit is declared and configured using the
CT via the 2w2B1Q card.
Maintenance functions can be provided by the remote power feed supplied through this card.
This manual does not describe the use of Subscriber Units, for more information, please refer to
their specific documentation.
1-72-144-288 kbps Baseband Transmitter-Receiver Port Card (BBTxRx)
This card transfers data on a 64, 128, or 256 kbps path, with overhead bits carrying
transmission error performance and maintenance information from end-to-end. Scrambling and
descrambling are performed in conformance to the ITU-T recommendation V.36.
The BBTxRx Card supports only one interface.
4-V.24/V.28 Port Card (V24/V28)
The card provides four separate standard DCE interfaces for connection to 1200 bps to 64 kbps
synchronous terminals, or 600 to 38400 bps asynchronous terminals.
The four separate interfaces are designed for point-to-point networking. As four timeslots may
be allocated to each Card, each link may be transmitted in a particular timeslot, or be combined
with one, two or three more links into one timeslot, depending on the network topology and bit
rate. The multiplexing procedure used is as described in the ITU-T recommendation V.110,
with, for example, four 9600 bps channels or two 19200 bps channels per timeslot.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-18
6 Subscriber Port Card (Subscr)
The card supports six separate interfaces providing voice line connections to any extensions,
videotex terminals, class 3 facsimile machines, and modems having a standard Z interface.
Each interface is the 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect signaling. It
is capable of interconnecting three S63 telephone sets in parallel.
Each individual interface may be configured for the following alternative modes of operation:
- exchange-to-extension mode through a 2 Mbps link, using the corresponding Exchan Card at
the far end,
- hot line mode in which a direct connection is set up between two extensions, and with calls
being initiated by the off-hook condition of either extension; this mode supposes the use of a
Subscr Card at the far-end.
In both these modes, the subscriber code used is 1- or 2-bit signaling.
For exchange-to-extension mode with 2-bit signaling, the Subscr Card can forward charge
metering and battery reversal information to local subscribers, and therefore is equally suited to
connection of conventional extensions and coinboxes.
For remote operating mode, the 6-Subscriber Port Card can be used for message transmission
(LF data) during the call phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase" .
6-Exchange Port Card (Exchan)
The card supports six separate interfaces providing connection to PABXs having standard Z
interfaces.
Each interface is the 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect signaling.
The subscriber code used is 1-bit signaling code.
When used in conjunction with the Subscr Card, the Exchan Card allows setting up of hot line
connections. It can forward charge metering and battery reversal information obtained from a
PABX to coinboxes.
The 6-Exchange Port Card can be used for message transmission (LF data) during the call
phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase".
12-Exchange Port Card (Exch12)
This card, equipped with 12 independent channels, provides connection of the subscriber
exchanges with Z-type interfaces.
The telephone interfaces are 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect
signaling. The signaling code used is 2-bit subscriber code.
When used in conjunction with the Subscr card, the Exch12 card allows setting subscriber
exchange-to-exchange connections and ordinary subscriber connections.
The 12-Exchange Port Card can be used for message transmission (LF data) during the call
phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase ".
4-U TRANSFIX Port Card (4U Transfix)
This card supports four independent 2B1Q interfaces operated in the TRANSMIC Extension
mode. (no ISDN mode).
NOTE: It is recommended to use a COB card equipped with a TCXO
The 4U Transfix Card provides connection S. Unit to the FMXvia a line using 2B1Q coding U
interfaces on which a repeater may be inserted.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-19
The use of a S. unit allows the remoting of low, medium and high bit rate units of the
V24/V11(V10), X24/V11, V.35 or V24/V28 type; the S. unit is declared and configured using the
CT via the 4U TRANSFIX card.
The remote power feed provided by this card allows maintenance functions to be performed.
Conference Card (CONF)
The CONFERENCE card (CONF) is used in linear networks, in conjunction with the FMX
drop/insert features of the FMX, to set up the functions of broadcasting, uploading, broadcasting
and uploading, conferencing of data.
The function of the CONFERENCE card can be created in two ways:
1. with a CONF card physically inserted in one of the general purpose slots of the shelf.
2. With a COB-B card on which the CONF function has been put into service.
In both cases, a interface card slot of FMX equipment is dedicated to the CONFERENCE but
functionally it is a common unit connected to the COB card.
The card is designed to receive an internal frame (CE) at 2 Mbit/s from the COB card's
switching matrix, and return an internal frame at 2 Mbit/s (CS) to the COB card when
processed.
IADB (Intelligent Access Device Board) card
The intelligent access device board (IADB) is a concentrator/multiplexer, X.25 bridge/router and
Frame Relay that uses MEGAPAC standard software.
This card has:
- 2 asynchronous serial interfaces used to connect configuration and statistics consoles, and
which are programmed at 9600 bit/s, 8 data bits NPB (No Parity Bit),
- 2 X24/V11 synchronous serial interfaces used for X25 and high bitrate (up to 2 Mbit/s) Frame
Relay connections,
- 2 X24/V11 synchronous serial interfaces used for X25, medium bitrate (up to 64 Mbit/s) Frame
Relay or asynchronous (up to 115.2 kbit/s) connections,
- a 10 BaseT Ethernet interface.
Since the card is not connected to the COB card matrix, the connection is made by external
cables to the V24/V11 or V24/V28 cards.
Ethernet Card (ETH)
The Ethernet (ETH) card is a static IP router. It is used to route IP data over Ethernet to
bundles consisting of N 64 kbit/s time slots (TS) of a 2 Mbit/s port.
This card includes:
an asynchronous serial interface for the local management port. This interface is accessible
on the RJ45 connector of the front panel. Its is programmed at 9600 bit/s, 8 data bits
without parity,
a 10/100BASE-T Ethernet interface in local management. This interface is accessible on
the RJ45 connector of the front panel.
data interfaces:
10/100BASE-T Ethernet. This interface is accessible on the connection area of the
FMX12 or FMX4 shelf,
4 fractionnal E1.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-20
Since the card is not connected to the COB card matrix, the 2 Mbit/s links connection is made
by external cables on one A2S card.
ADPCM Card (ADPCM)
The ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) card carries out compression and
decompression of the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) coded voice channels using the ADPCM
algorithm.
The ADPCM card physically occupies an interface card slot but is functionally a common
equipment unit connected to the COB card. The ADPCM card receives a 2 Mbit/s internal frame
(CE) from the COB card matrix and sends back a 2 Mbit/s internal frame (CS) after processing.
4 asynchronous ports Card (4VAS)
The 4 asynchronous ports card (4VAS) includes four independant interfaces of DCE type. This
card allows to connect asynchronous equipments at rates from 300 to 38 400 bps.
This card has four independant ports to release point to point links. Four Time Slots (TS) can be
assigned to the card, each link is carried by one specific Time Slot (TS).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-21
Card Type Interface
Type
Bit Rate No. of
Ports
per
Card
Characteristics Example of
Application
Circuit
Type
2MU
(1-2 Mbps port)
HDB3 2048 kbps 1 G.703, G.704 Digital PABX,
Primary PCM
terminals,
High speed
terminals,
ISDN 30B+D
primary rate
access
SELV
A2S
(4-2 Mbps
structured ports)
HDB3 2048 kbps 4 G.703, G.704 Digital PABX,
Primary PCM
terminals,
High speed
terminals,
ISDN 30B+D
primary rate
access
SELV
3 64 I
(3 64 I ports)
64 kbps with
64 kbps
signaling
64 kbps 3 Codirectional
G.703
Data adapter SELV,
6PAFC
(6-Programmable
AF Channel)
2W/4W with
E&M signaling
Analog
300-3400 Hz
6 2 E&Ms per
interface
to G.713 (2W)
to G.712 and
G.714 (4W)
Modem
PABX
Data adapter
Signaling
adapter
TNV
(signal-
ing)
V24/V11
(3-V24/V11(V10)
ports)
V.24/V.11(V.10)
X.24/V.11
V.35
48, 56,
n x 64 kbps
(1)
(1\n\31)
3 DCE interface to
V.24,
V.11(V.10), X.24
or V.35
High-speed
terminals
Video Codecs
computer front-
ends
SELV
V24/V28
(4-V24/V28
ports
V.24, V.28 1200 bps to
64 kbps
synchronous
600 to 38.4 kbps
asynchronous
4 DTE interface
to V.24/V.28/
V.110
PC
Modems
SELV
4VAS
(4-asynchronous
ports)
V.24, V.28 300 to 38.4 kbps
asynchronous
4 DTE interface
to V.24/V.28
PC
Modems
SELV
2w2B1Q
(2-2w2B1Q
ports)
2B+D ISDN 2 G.960 and
G.961
DE/TM 3004
and DTR/TM
3002 (ETSI)
ISDN
subscriber
remote units
TANGARA
station remote
units
S. unit remote
units
TNV
(1) For 2 Mbps operation on card internal datastreams, bit rate for each of the three ports
must not exceed 512 kbps. The CT controls switching from 2 to 8 Mbps operation on the
internal datastreams (3 x 512 kbps or 3 x 1984 kbps parameter). For operation in the
8 Mbps on internal dastastream mode, the value of the bit rate on the three ports may be
programmed above 512 kbps.
(2) BBTx/Rx: Baseband Transmitter/Receiver
Table 1.1 - FMX System Interfaces (1/2)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-22
Card Type Interface
Type
Bit Rate No. of
Ports
per
Card
Characteristics Example of
Application
Circuit
Type
BBTxRx
(1-BBTxRx
port)
BBTxRx(2) 72, 144 or
288 kbs
1 Baseband Remote modem TNV
Subscrib 2-wire
phone line
300-3400 Hz
analog
6 To G.711 (A law)
Q.552
Exchange-to-
extension (or
coinbox) voice line,
Hotline link
TNV
Exchan
(Exch12)
2-wire
phone line
300-3400 Hz
analog
6 (or
12)
To G.711 (A law)
Q.552
Exchange-to-
extension (or
coinbox) voice line
TNV
4U Transfix 2 B + D ISDN 4 G.960 and G.961
DE/TM 3004 et
DTR/TM 3002 (ETSI)
S. unit remote TNV
CONF
(Conference)
- V.110 digital
data at a
bitrate below
64 kbit/s and
digital data at
64 kbit/s,
analog data
at 64 kbit/s
- Broadcast, sink, data
broadcast and sink
and conference for
linear networks
-
IADB 2 async serial
interfaces
9600 bits/s Connecting
configuration and
statistics consoles
SELV
2 X24/V11
synchronous
serial interfaces
up to 2 Mbit/s X25, high bitrate
Frame relay
connection
SELV
2 V28 sync or
async serial
interfaces
up to
64 kbit/s
async and
115.2 kbit/s
sync
X25, medium bitrate
Frame relay or async
connection
SELV
and
1 10 baseT
Ethernet
interface
Ethernet interface. SELV
ETH Asynchronous
serial,
9600 bits/s 1 Local Configuration SELV
Ethernet, 10/100
BASE-T
1 Local Configuration SELV
Ethernet, 10/100
BASE-T
1 Data SELV
HDB3 2048 kbit/s 4 G.703, G.704 Data to A2S card SELV
ADPCM - 2 Mbit/s - Cmpression -
NOTE: The interfaces associated with the common equipment units (CEU) are SELV type.
Table 1.2 - FMX System Interfaces (2/2)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-23
Figure 1.2 - Functional Organization
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-24
1.3 Equipment Composition
The various FMX equipment cards may be contained in three types of shelf, a shelf being itself
installed in a CEPT type B, M3 or ETSI or 19" rack-mounting:
10U front-end connection shelf (FMX12 shelf),
10U front-end connection shelf (FMX9-S shelf),
4U rear-end connection shelf (19" and ETSI rack-mounting only or on table) (FMX4 shelf).
Each shelf, apart from the FMX4 shelf, is equipped with:
one or two Power Converter Cards, according to the shelf configuration,
one (or two) connection, timing circuit and synchronization cards (COB cards) which
combines the data and associated channel-associated signaling cross-connect,
synchronization, internal messaging processing, EOC channel processing, and Frame
Relay generating functions.
NOTE: The COB card is inserted by default in slot no. 16 of the shelf; the second COB card
used for equipment backup operation is plugged into slot no. 17.
a management and auxiliary interface (GIE-S) card, which is the control unit providing all
the management and supervision functions, is plugged into slot no. 15,
NOTE: Along with the power converter card(s), these last two cards for the common
equipment units,
and either:
one to eleven port cards (card slots 03 to 14) to be selected from the following:
. 1 or 4-2 Mbps Multiuse Port Card (2MU or A2S),
. 3-V.24/V.11 (V.10) Port Card (V24/V11),
. 4-V.24/V.28 Port Card (V24/V28 or 4VAS),
. 3-64 kbps Interface Card (3 64 I),
. 6-Programmable Audio Frequency Channel Card (6PFAC),
. 2-2 wire 2B1Q Port Card (2w2B1Q),
. 1-Baseband Transmitter-Receiver Port Card (BBTxRx),
. 4-2 wire 2B1Q Port Card (4U Transfix)
. 6-Subscriber Port Card (Subscr),
. 6-Exchange Port Card (Exchan),
. 12- Exchange Port Card (Exch12) (FMX12 and FMX shelves only),
. IADB Card (IADB),
. Ethernet Card (ETH),
. Conference Card (CONF),
. ADPCM Card (ADPCM).
The FMX12 shelf can be equipped 1 to 12 access cards (slots standardized 03 to 14) among
the cards listed hereafter.
The FMX9-S shelf can be equipped 1 to 9 access cards (slots standardized 06 to 14 among the
cards listed hereafter. Furthermore, this can be equipped 1 or 2 LTU SHDSL or NTU 2wires or
4wires cards (slots 03 and 04).
The FMX4 shelf has:
-48 V power converter in slot 1 as in previous versions,
a COB card and a GIE-S card which are inserted in specific slots,
up to 4 port cards (multipurpose slots 03 to 06) chosen from the cards listed above.
The system functional organization is as shown in Figure 1.2.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-25
1.4 Specifications
1.4.1 System Specifications
NOTE: Port specifications are given separately for the respective cards.
1.4.1.1 Mechanical Specifications
Front-end connection shelf (FMX12 or FMX9-S)
Rack-mounting CEPT Type B
19-inch / 80, ETSI and M3 compatible
Dimensions
- height 420 mm (useful spacing 10U)
- width 440 mm
- depth 270 mm
Weight (shelf + cards) about 22 Kg
Rear connection shelf (FMX4)
Mechanical characteristics 19" and ETSI rack-mounting
Dimensions
- height 177 mm (4 U)
- width 440 mm (19")
- depth 260 mm.
Weight (shelf + cards) about 10 Kg
1.4.1.2 Auxiliary Ports
External synchronization port
(to ITU-T recommendation G.703)
Termination Two balanced pairs (transmit, receive)
Impedance 120
Balanced pairs at 1 MHz
Frequency (input + output) 2048 kHz 50.10
-6
Return loss > 15 dB at 2048 kHz
Synchronization output
(To ITU-T recommendation G.703, table X)
Synchronized to active synchronization source.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-26
Alarms
- Major or minor alarm dry relay contacts,
(except FMX4 shelf max. voltage: 150 V
equipped with 110/230V mains supply) max. current: 1.5 A
max. power: 30 W
- TNM information service ground or relay
contacts (strap-selectable)
max. voltage: 150 V
max. current: 1.5 A
max. power: 30 W
- Remote controls (2 operator- three point dry relay contact
configurable alarms) max. voltage: 72 V
max. current: 300 mA
- Remote monitoring (3) typical current: 2 mA
input impedance: > 20 k
external loop impedance:
. to 3 k (contact closed)
. to 1 M (contact open)
Supervisory interface
Local CT connection
(To ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28)
- Transmission mode asynchronous (DCE mode), 9600 bps
- Location RJ45 connector on GIE-S card front panel
(V.24/V.28 type F interface).
- Local selection (DCE)/ switch on GIE-S card front panel
Remote CT connection via modem
- Transmission mode asynchronous (DTE mode), 9600 bps
- Location connection on connection panel front panel
or at rear of shelf (depending on shelf type
used)
Connection to RMS (IONOS Management)
- Type of connection port Ethernet 10/100 BT
- Rate 10 or 100 MHz
- Mode Half or full duplex
- Type of cable straight or crossed
- Location connector on connection panel or rear of shelf
(depending on shelf type used)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-27
P1 and P2 Management Interface
- Transmission mode synchrone V11 (diffrential)
- rate 64 kbps
P1 and P2 management interfaces timing diagram, codirectional mode (64 kbps synchronous
mode)
B8 B1 B2
B8 B1 B2
RXP (B-A)
RXCLKP (B-A)
TXCLKP (B-A)
TXP (B-A)
(output for data to transmit
on P interface)
(output for clock to transmit
on P interface)
(intput for data received
from P interface)
(intput for clock received
from P interface)
NOTE : P1 and P2 management interfaces can be configured in ingoing contradirectional
mode. In this operating mode, RXCLKP (B-A) signals are inputs.
1.4.1.3 Power Requirements
Station equipment supplied with 48 V (SELV) via one or two backed up power converters.
NOTE: The FMX4 shelf Power Supplly cannot be protected.
In compliance with specifications ETS 300 132-1 of December 1996 and ETS 300 132-2 of May
1996.
Rated voltage -48V
Range -40V -70V
Power Converter P3
(FMX12 or FMX9-S shelves)
-48V / 5V, 53V
Power Converter -48V (shelf FMX4) -48V / 5V, +12V, 53V, -48V Sig
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-28
Nominal sub-assembly (steady state) power consumption:
The table below shows typical sub-assembly consumption. For each sub-assembly it specifies:
- internal consumption dissipated by the sub-assembly inside the shelf,
- external consumption supplied in the port card lines for the subscriber sub-assemblies
(2w2B1Q, Subscr,...).
SUB-ASSEMBLIES
INTERNAL
CONSUMPTION (W)
EXTERNAL
CONSUMPTION (W)
GIE-S 1.7
COB / COB-B (CEU) 3.5 / 2.5
3 64 I (3-64 Interface Card) 0.5
2MU (1-2 Mbps Port Card) 0.7
A2S (4-2 Mbps Port Card) 2
BBTxRx (1-BBTx/Rx Port Card) 2
V24/V28 (4-V24/V28 Port Card) 1.6
4VAS (4 asynchronous ports Card) 1
V24/V11 (3-V24/V11(V10) Port Card) 2.6
6PAFC (6-Progammable Audio Frequency Channel card) 1.1
2w2B1Q (2-2w2B1Q U Port Card)
- NUMERIS extension (TNR power feed)
- repeaterless TRANSMIC extension (TNR
power feed)
- TRANSMIC ext with repeater
- short-circuit interface
2.7 + 0.1/int
2.7
2.7 + 0.2/int
2.7 + 4.2/int
1.6/int
0.8/int
2.3/int
-
Subscr Card
3
(6- Subscriber Port Card)
- interface available
- interface busy
- interface ringing
0.6/int
0.7/int
3/int
-
2/int
0.8/int
Exchan Card (6- Exchange Port Card) 1.7 -
Exch12 Card (12- Exchange Port Card) 1.4 -
4U Transfix (4-2w2B1Q U Port Card)
- mains power feed
- remote power feed
- with repeater and remote power feed
3 + 0.4 /int
3 + 0.6/int
3 + 1.5/int
-
0.12/int
1/int
CONF 3 -
IADB 5 -
ETH 5 -
ADPCM 4 -
P3 Power Converter (CEU) 30% Tpc* -
-48V Power Converter 30% Tpc* -
230V Power Supply 30% Tpc* -
* Tpc = Total power consumption of equipment and its peripherals.
Tps = Total power supply at power converter or power supply input = Tps x 1,3 (typical yield
= 77 %). Tps represents the power used by the equipment and its peripherals and the
losses dissipated by the Joule effect in the power converter or power supply ( 36 W
for P3 power converter and 22 for -48V power converter and 230V power supply ).
The power supplied by the power converter or the power supply includes the internal
power consumption and the external power consumption (Joule effect on the line, load
of extensions, remote termination units or TNRs fed by line interface of the equipment
port card.
NOTE: In the case of protected power converters, the useful load is divided between
two converters at a ratio of 50 20 %. In the event of failure of one converter,
the useful power is supplied by the other.

3
The values of consumption are valid only provided that the accesses are configured:
"InputZ" = "RefZ".
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-29
Computation example:
2w2B1Q card: 1 NUMERIS interface and 1 TRANSMIC interface with repeater:
Power dissipated in the card (Pcard) = 2.7 + 0.1 + 0.2 = 3 W
Line power supplied (Pext) = 1.6 + 2.3 = 3.9 W
Power dissipated in converter (30 % x (Pcard + Pext) = 0.3 x (3 + 3.9) = 2.1 W
Power sampled on shelf 48 V power supply = 3 + 3.9 + 2.1 = 9 W.
1.4.1.4 Environmental Conditions
Temperature
ETS 300 019 1.3 class 3-1
- Normal operating temperature range 0C to +55C with 5% to 85% humidity
- Storage (packed) temperature range
5% relative humidity -8C to +60C
100% relative humidity -30C to + 27C
Mechanical environment
ETS 300 019 1.4 of February 1992
Radioelectric and electrostatic environment
in compliance with ETS 300 386-1 of December 1994
Safety
The equipment complies with NF specification EN 60950.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-30
1.4.1.5 Predictable Reliability
Unless indicated, predictable reliability calculations have been done upon CI Mentor Graphics
data base. This data base contains actual reliability data results coming from various
telecommunications and computer equipments.
Calculation assumptions are compliant with UTEC 80810 standard (section 2.1-2.2.2.3).
Environmental conditions are the following:
Environnment "GROUND ; FIXED ; PROTECTED" (Ground based, Stationary use,
weatherprotected location).
Ambient temperature near the components : 40C.
Sub-set Forecast Failure Rate (in 10
-9
/h)
GIE-S 658
COB / COB-B 563 / 684
A2S 326
V24/V28 393
4VAS 461
V24/V11 531
6PAFC 1685
2w2B1Q 707
Exchan 1301
Subsr 3757
Exch12 3473
4U TRANSFIX 946
CONF 355
ADPCM 225
3 64 I () 589
BBTxRx () 1326
2MU () 497
IADB () 1497
ETH 1340
V3 Pwr Converter 1067
Battery Power Converter - 48 V ()() 4507
110/230V Mains Power Supply ()() 4954
FMX12 shelf + filter 1026
P3 Subscriber Shelf + filter 688
FMX4 Shelf without fan ()() 654
Adapter Card ():
for GIE 65
for COB 59
for V24/V11 port 74
for line port 68
for V24/V28 port 73
() Predictable reliability computations are based on the CNET's 1993 issue (RDF 93) of the
Reliability Data Manual.
() Ground, Fixed, Protected.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-31
1.4.2 2MU Card Specifications
2048 kbps 4-wire digital interface to ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.704.
- Bit rate 2048 kbps 50 x 10
-6
- Code HDB3
- Input impedance 120 balanced pairs
- Transmission-to-reception < 6 dB
permissible attenuation (at 1 MHz)
- Jitter to ITU-T recommendations G.823 and G.736
- Reception cable screen strap-selectable earthing
- Loopbacks to ITU-T recommendation X.150
1.4.3 A2S Card Specifications
Four 2048 kbps 4-wire digital interfaces to ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.704.
- Bit rate 2048 kbps 50 x 10
-6
- Code HDB3
- Input impedance 120 balanced pairs or 75 (coaxial pair) via link
option
- Transmission-to-reception < 6 dB
permissible attenuation (at 1 MHz)
- Jitter to ITU-T recommendations G.823
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-32
1.4.4 V.24/V.11 Card Specifications
Interfaces to ITU-T recommendations V.10, V.11, V.24, X.21 and X.24.
- Mode DCE
- Bit rates 48, 56 or n x 64 kbps with 1 < n < 31 (*)
For the 48 kbps and 56 kbps rates,
64 kbps rate adoption in accordance
with ITU-T recommendation V.110 or X50 bits
- V.11 reception interface impedance 120 + 10 %
- X.24/V.11 operation
. circuits used G, T, R, C, I, S, B
. electrical specifications V.11
- V.24/V.11 operation (V.10)
. circuits used 102, 102a, 102b
103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109
114, 115, 140, 141, 142
. electrical specifications V.11: 103, 104, 113, 114, 115
V.10: 106, 107, 108, 140, 141, 142
V.10 or V.11: 105, 109, (selection via CT for the
two
circuits of one interface)
Other specifications
- Front panel connector Not used
(*) For 2 Mbps operation on card internal datastreams, bit rate for each of the three ports must
not exceed 512 kbps. The CT controls switching from 2 to 8 Mbps operation on the internal
datastreams (3 x 512 kbps or 3 x 1984 kbps parameter). For operation in the 8 Mbps on
internal dastastream mode, the value of the bit rate on the three ports may be programmed
above 512 kbps.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-33
1.4.5 V.24/V.28 Card Specifications
Interfaces to ITU-T recommendations V.24, V.28.
Asynchronous
- Mode DCE
- Bit rates 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
- Character format Length: 7 to 8 bits
Parity: even, odd, none
Stop bits: 1 or 2-bits
- Flow control 105/106
- Interchange circuits 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108/2, 109, 140, 141, 142
Synchronous
- Mode DCE
- Bit rates 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 48000,
56000, 64000 bps
- Clock Internal
- Interchange circuits 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108/2, 109,
114, 115, 140, 141, 142
- Multiplexing to ITU-T recommendation V.110
1.4.6 4VAS Card Specifications
Interfaces to ITU-T recommendations V.24, V.28.
Asynchronous
- Mode DCE
- Bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
bps
- Character format Length : 7 to 8 bits
Parity : even, odd, none
Stop bit : 1 bit
- Flow control 105/106
- Interchange circuits 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108/2, 109, 140, 141, 142
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-34
1.4.7 3 64 I Card Specifications
Codirectional 64 kbps 4-data wire + 64 kbps 4-signalling wire interface
(to ITU-T recommendation G.703)
- Nominal bit rate data: 64 kbps
signaling: 64 kbps
- Impedance 120 (balanced pairs)
- Input attenuation 0 to 3 dB
- Jitter to ITU-T recommendation G.823
- Reception cable screen strap-selectable earthing (0)
Signaling interface
- Tx interface Unbalanced relative to 0V. Protected
against short-circuits at 0V.
TTL compatible.
Permissible load > 1 k at +5V
- Rx interface Optocoupler for galvanic isolation
Max. current: 20 mA
- Line code NRZ
- Loopbacks to ITU-T Recommendation X.150
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-35
1.4.8 6PAFC Card Specifications
4-wire AF interface
(to ITU-T recommendations G.712 and G.714)
- Frequency band 300 to 3400 Hz
- Impedance at 800 Hz 600
(input or output) Balanced pair
- Levels on 4-wire ports
nominal transmit - 14 dB
nominal receive + 4 dB
- Adjustable power range (adjustment in 0.5 dB steps)
Tx input - 0.5 dBr to -16 dBr
Rx output + 7.0 dBr to -8.5 dBr
- Load capacitance + 3.14 0.2 dBm0
- Protection of interfaces to CSE specification I 31-24
2-wire AF interface
(to ITU-T recommendations G.713 and G.715)
- Frequency band 300 to 3400 Hz
- Input/output impedance 600 Balanced pair
- Levels on 2-wire ports
nominal on Tx - 13 dB
nominal on Rx - 4 dB
- Adjustable power range (adjustment in 0.5 dB steps)
Tx input - 2.5 dBr to -13 dBr
Rx output - 2.0 dBr to -17.5 dBr
- Load capacitance + 3.14 0.3 dBm0
- Protection of interfaces to CSE specification I 31-24
Signaling interface
- Two E wires and two M wires per interface corresponding to signaling bits a and b
- E signal: earth applied to E wire via a 47 resistor. Galvanic isolation by optoelectronic
coupler
- M signal: earth applied to M wire detected by closure of -48V circuit via optoelectronic
coupler and 5.1 k resistor
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-36
1.4.9 2w2B1Q Card Specifications
Complying with ITU-T recommendations Q.960 and G.961 and ETSI specifications DE/TM 3004
and DTR/TM 3002
- Line Code 2B1Q
(U frames)
- Modulation speed 80 kbaud
- No. of interfaces 2 (independents from an operating point of view)
ISDN Operation
- distribution of channels relative to two card interfaces on 5 or 6 TSs
- "U subscriber" mode for both card ports
* line remote power feed + 50 V et - 50 V
* operating instructions received
from far-end "U network" interfaces
- "U network" mode for both card ports
* line remote power feed detection
* far-end U Subscriber interface management
* transmission of a synchronization signal usable by COB card
TRANSMIC Extension Operation
Connection to a REGAT S. unit for low, medium or high bit rate unit extensions
NOTE: The 2w2B1Q card allows U subscriber mode operation on one of the interfaces and
TRANSMIC extension" mode on the other.
Other characteristics
- Front panel connector unused
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-37
1.4.10 BBTxRx Card Specifications
- Bit Rate 72, 144 or 288 kbps
- Transmission Mode serial isochronous
- Code order 2 interleaved bipolar
- Spectrum of signals transmitted between 0 and F/2 of bit rate (or 36 kHz,
72 kHz or 144 kHz) via transmitted signal
filtering
- Transmission level 6V peak-to-peak +0 -10 %
- Receive level 40 dB attenuation at 72 kHz, 144 kHz or 288 kHz
frequency
- Max. Permissible current 6 mA
at receive interface
- Line port impedance 150
- Frame specific to BBTx/Rx to ITU-T recommendation V.36
with scrambling and descrambling
- Transmission medium line 4F
- Maintenance DC
transmitted to exchange 2.7 mA 10%
transmitted by subscriber 5.4 mA 10%
- Recovery range 0.7 10-4 at nominal frequency
of receive clock
- Equalization at reception Automatic equalization from 0 to 40 dB at
nominal bit rate
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-38
1.4.11 Subscr Card Specifications
Interfaces to ITU-T recommendation Q.552.
- Line powering 48 V
- Impedance 600 or complex impedance with Zref such as
R1 = Rs = 215 ,
R2 = Rp = 1000 and C = Cp = 137 nF
- Loop resistance < 600 .
- Ringing frequency Ring to 50 2 Hz
- Speech coding G.711 A law
. Bandwidth 300 Hz - 3400 Hz
. Coding period 3.9 s
. Load capacitance + 3.14 dBmo
- Signaling code 2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
- Transmission levels
Type of plan Transmission Input Port Reception Output Port
Standard
Adjustable (in 0.5 dB steps)
0 dBr
0 dBr to -5 dBr
-7 dBr
-2 dBr to -7.5 dBr
- Possibility of connecting 1 to 3 S3 telephone sets to a same access port
- Possibility of ring transmission to two access ports of the Card simultaneously
- Transparent to message transmission during the call phase.
- Exchange-to-extension operation
. connection of telephone extensions to a central office switch or a PABX
. charge metering 12 kHz
. line polarity normal polarity: negative polarity on wire A,
positive
polarity on wire B reverse polarity: polarity
switching between wires A and B by battery
reversal
. busy tone frequency 440 Hz
. Level - 11 2 dBm0
. Sequencing (transmission/silence) 500 50 ms/500 50 ms
- Hotline operation
- busy tone and ringing tone frequency
. Frequency 440 8 Hz
. Level - 11 2 dBm0
. Sequencing (transmission/silence) Call return: 1500 150 ms/3500 350 ms
Busy: 500 50 ms/500 50 ms
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-39
1.4.12 Exchan Card Specifications
- Impedance 600 or complex impedance with Zref such as
R1 = Rs = 215 , R2 = Rp = 1000 and
C = Cp = 137 nF
- Loop resistance 1100 max.
- Ringing frequency
. Frequency 50 5 Hz
. RMS voltage at 50 Hz 60 to 80 V (through resistance between 0 and
600 ohms)
. Duration greater than 200 ms
- Charge metering detected 12 kHz
- Detection of the polarity reversal applied to line wires
. Bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz
. Load capacitance +3.14 dBmo
-Signaling code 2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
Type of plan
(Depending on operation)
Transmission Input Port Reception Output Port
Standard
Short line
-6 dBr
-3 dBr
-2 dBr to -7.5 dBr
-1 dBr
-4 dBr
0 dBr to -5 dBr
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-40
1.4.13 Exch12 Card Specifications
- Impedance 600 or complex impedance with Zref
- Loop resistance 1100 max.
- Ringing frequency
. Frequency 25 to 50 5 Hz
. RMS voltage at 50 Hz 40 to 90 V (through a resistance between 0 and
1 k)
. Duration greater than 200 ms
. Bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz
. Load capacitance +3.14 dBmo
- Signaling code 2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
Type of plan
(Depending on operation)
Transmission Input Port Reception Output Port
Short line
-3 dBr
-2 dBr to -7.5 dBr
-4 dBr
0 dBr to -5 dBr
1.4.14 4U Transfix Card Characteristics
Complying with ITU-T recommendations Q.960 and G.961 and ETSI specifications DE/TM 3004
and DTR/TM 3002.
- Line Code 2B1Q
(U frames)
- Modulation Speed 80 kbaud
- Line remote power feed + 50 V and 50 V
(MMI controlled)
- No. of ports 4 (independent from operating point of view)
Connection to REGAT S. Unit for low, medium and hit bit rate unit extensions.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-41
1.4.15 CONF function Characteristics
The CONF function is used in linear networks, in conjunction with the FMX drop/insert features
of the FMX, to set up the following functions:
- broadcasting,
- uploading,
- broadcasting and uploading,
- conferencing,
of data which may be digital (data channels carrying signals from computer terminals) or
analogue (data channels carrying audiofrequency signals PCM encoded with A law
compression).
Functional characteristics:
Analog bridges : 24 analog channels of the CE/CS internal
frame (IT1 to IT15 and IT17 to IT31) and 12
bridges,
Digital bridges : 20 low bit rate digital channels (V.110 frame)
or medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) capable of
distribution over the 30 time slots of the
CE/CS internal frame) and:
. If there is no conference bridge; eight
broadcast and/or uploading bridges,
. If there is a conference bridge; six bridges
including a maximum of three conference
bridges.
Information transfert time: : The TS transfer time between CONF card
input and output is less than the time
occupied by three 125 s frames.
1.4.16 IADB Card Characteristics
IADB card is a concentrator/multiplexer, X25 bridge/router and "Frame Relay" which uses
MEGAPAC standard software.
The implemented protocols are of two types:
- WAN (Wide Area Network) protocols such as X25, FrameRelay,
- LAN (Local Area Network) protocols (Ethernet).
These protocols are carried by the FMX on nTS (n 10) through a V11 interface.
Lithium battery allows to save the memory informations.
Battery specifications:
Storage:
The IADB card is delivered with a new battery.
Battery Life and Reliability:
Battery life may reach up to 10 years.
Reference:
CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 500 mA/h Lithium battery.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-42
1.4.17 ETH Card Characteristics
The Ethernet card (ETH) is a static IP router. This card allows to route IP data over Ethernet
towards bundles, constitued of N 64 kbit/s TS, of a 2 Mbit/s port.
N = 1 to 31,
This card offers 4x2 Mbit/s ports,
1 bundle is entirely brought by 1x2 Mbit/s port (no overlapping),
the other end of the bundle is obligatorily another ETH card,
between 2 ETH cards from network, only one bundle exists,
1x2 Mbit/s port brings 8 bundles at the most.
1.4.18 ADPCM Card Characteristics
ADPCM card handles 32 or 16 kbit/s ADPCM code transcoding.
- Transcoding PCM/ADPCM)
- PCM law type G.711 law A
- ADPCM Coding bit rate 32 kbit/s (4 bits per channel) or 16 kbit/s (2 bits
per channel)
- ADPCM coding law To ITU-T recommendation G.726
- Processing capacity 32 kbit/s :
20 PCM 64 kbit/s channels and 20 ADPCM
channels,
16 kbit/s :
24 PCM 64 kbit/s channels and 2 ADPCM
channels,
- signalling processing 32 kbit/s (2 bits per ADPCM channel) :
- either signalling bits a and b,
- either signalling bit a and maintenance bit c.
16 kbit/s (1 bit per ADPCM channel) :
- either signalling bit a,
- either maintenance bit c.
1.4.19 GIE-S Card Battery Specifications
Storage
The GIE P card is delivered with a new battery.
Battery Life and Reliability
Battery life may reach up to 10 years.
Reference
CR 2430 Type for Printed Board, 3 V - 270 mAh Lithium battery.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-43
1.5 Reminder of the Frame Structure
1.5.1 2 Mbps Frame (to ITU-T recommendation G.704)
The 2048 kbps frame has a period of 125 s in time. It further divides into 32 time slots (TS 0 to
TS 31), containing the binary information. Each TS contains 8 bits (1-8).
TSs 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are allocated to 30 channels numbered 1 to 30.
TS 0 Interpretation
TS 0 is used for transmitting frame alignment information which is present in every other frame:
- TS 0 in even-numbered frames: FA Word I 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
- TS 0 in odd-numbered frames: nFA Word I 1 A N N N N N
whereI: set to 1 or used for the CRC4 procedure
A: remote error indication bit
N: is the national reserve bit used depending on the frame being processed
(see Table 1.3).
BITS TR2G Other frames (1)
IT0 Odd frame
Bit 3 0: Normal 1: FAL, SigFail 0: Normal 1: FAL,
Sig Fail,
AIS
Bit 4 1: Normal 0: AIS
Bit 5 1: Normal 0: GSF
Bit 6 1: unused or
0 or 1: for PPS or
1: Normal 0: Power Fail
Not processed (sent to 1) or
control access channel at
n x 4 kbps (n = 1 to 5)
Bit 7 Not processed (sent as 1) or
control access channel at
n x 4 kbps (n = 1 or 2)
Bit 8
(1) Other frames: G.732, G.732i, G.736 or Transfix
Table 1.3 - Spare Bit Allocations in Odd-numbered Frame TS 0s
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-44
TS16 Interpretation
TS16 is allocated to the Channel-Associated Signaling transmission: 16 consecutive frames
form a multiframe (numbered 0 to 15).
The multiframe alignment signal is 0000; it uses bits 1 to 4 of TS16 in frame 0:
- TS16 in frame 0: MFA Word 0 0 0 0 x y x x
- TS16 in frames 1 to 15: a b c d a b c d
where x: reserve bits, set to 1 if unused (see details later on)
y: indicates MultiFrame Alignment Loss
(TR2G, G.732, G.732i and Transfix)
a b c d: 1st quadribit = n channel Signaling
a b c d: 2nd quadribit = channel n+15 Signaling
BITS TR2G G.732 G.732i
IT16
Frame 0
bit 5
bit 6
bit 7
bit 8
1
0: N - 1: FAL
1
1
same as TR2G
1
0: N - 1: FAL
1
Setting to 1 or 0
available
IT16
Frames 1 to 15
a
b
c
d
Tx Rx (*)
a a
b b
c c
d d
Tx Rx (*)
a a
b b or 1
c c or 0
d d or 1
Tx Rx (*)
a a
b b or1
unused 0
d d or 1
(*) Received or transmitted at interface level.
NOTE: Whatever the frame used, frame "c" is available.
Table 1.4 - TS16 Bit Allocations
Special case:
G.704-G.736 frames TS16 in frame 0 is not processed
TS16s in frames 1 to 15 are not processed at the interface and are set
to 1 for onward transmission
NOTE: In the above table, the choice for a bit value is defined by CT (RMS).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-45
1.5.2 64 I + Signaling Frame
Structure of the 64 kbps datastream: data and Signaling streams
7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
Sig
a
Sig
b
Sig
a
Sig
b
Bipolarity violation
64 I Data
Signalling
1 - 64 I terminal (DTE)-to-FMX (3 64 I Card) direction
Violation Violation
Data bit 8 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8
Sig EA EB X X X X X X EA
2 - FMX (3 64 I Card)-to-64 I terminal (DTE) direction
Violation Violation
Data bit 8 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8
Sig MA MB MC 0 0 0 0 0 MA
X: any value
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-46
1.5.3 72-144-288 kbps BBTxRx Frame
The 72 kbps frame contains 27 bits forming the 64 kbps data bytes with which an 8 kHz
overhead bit (Frame E) is associated. It has the following structure:
72 kbps frame
1 Data Byte 1 Data Byte H Data Byte 0

Frame E E E E E
/ \
/ \
Frame H S, X4, X3, X2, X1
Bit H carries Signaling, alarm, and maintenance information and is framed over 5 bits as
follows:
- bit S: alternating 1s/0s for synchronization,
- four bits X4 to X1 for the Signaling information interchange between the subscriber-side
baseband transmitter-receiver and FMX (BBTxRx Card):
with the following items in the subscriber baseband transmitter-receiver-to-FMX
direction (BBTxRx Card):
X4: EA
X3: EB
X2: Remote loopback (loopback 3 control orders to extension) - active state at 0
X1: Far-end failure (set to 1)
and in the FMX-to-baseband transmitter-receiver direction:
X4: MA
X3: MB
X2: Remote loopback receipt acknowledgment - active state at 0
X1: Reserved (set to 0)
The 144 and 288 kbps datastreams are framed in a similar fashion. Bit H has the same role and
the data bytes have bit rates of 128 and 256 kbps, respectively, while frame E has a bit rate of
16 and 32 kbps.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-47
1.5.4 U Frames
Eight frames U make up a multiframe U in order to transmit:
- two B channels for 64 kbps data,
- one D channel for 16 kbps data,
- one 4 kbps LC channel for monitoring and maintenance.
Each frame U contains:
- a sync-frame word over 18 bits,
- 216 data bits: 12 areas of 2B + D channels, each area including 18 bits,
- 6 LC channel bits.
The eighteen bits of a 2B + D area are distributed as follows:
- 8 bits (4 quats) per channel B,
- 2 bits (1 quat) per channel D.
Channel LC includes 48 bits distributed in a multiframe U.
Structure of a multiframe U:
Sync-frame
word 2B+D 48 bits in channel LC
1 ISW: 18 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
2 SW: 18 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
ISW: multiframe synchronization
SW: frame synchronization
In the "network U"-to-"subscriber U" access direction, the information contained in channel LC
is as follows:
EOC
a1
EOC
a2
EOC
a3
ACT 1 1
EOCd/m EOC1 EOC2 DEA 1 FEBE
EOC3 EOC4 EOC5 1 CRC1 CRC2
EOC
a1
EOC
a2
EOC
a3
1 CRC5 CRC6
EOCd/m EOC1 EOC2 1 CRC7 CRC8
EOC3 EOC4 EOC5 U0A CRC9 CRC10
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 1-48
In the "U subscriber" to "network U" direction, the information contained in channel LC is as
follows:
EOC
a1
EOC
a2
EOC
a3
ACT 1 1
EOCd/m EOC1 EOC2 PS1 1 FEBE
EOC3 EOC4 EOC5 PS2 CRC1 CRC2
EOC6 EOC7 EOC8 NTM CRC3 CRC4
EOC
a1
EOC
a2
EOC
a3
CS0 CRC5 CRC6
EOCd/m EOC1 EOC2 1 CRC7 CRC8
EOC3 EOC4 EOC5 SAI CRC9 CRC10
Meaning of symbols and abbreviations:
a1 to a3 address bits
ACT activation bit (set to "1" during channel transparency)
CRC cyclic redundancy control
CS0 bit "cold start-up only" (not used, set to "0")
DEA deactivation bit (set to "0" to control deactivation)
d/m data or message indicator
EOC maintenance channel
EOC1 to EOC8 information (data/message)
FEBE Far-end block error bit (set to "0" for a multiframe containing an error)
NTM test bit (no used, set to "1")
PS1, PS2 power supply state bits (set to "0" to indicate a power supply failure)
SAI activity indication bit
U0A interface U only activation request (set to "0" to activate U only)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-1
SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION
2.
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-2
C
O
B

(
S
E
C
U
R
I
S
A
T
I
O
N
)
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
G
I
E
-
S
C
O
B
1
2
u
n
a
s
s
ig
n
e
d
s
lo
ts
Cover
Figure 2.1 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX12 shelf)
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-3
2.1 Front Connection Shelf Description (FMX12 shelf)
This shelf comprises two parts (see Figure 2.1):
a 7U lower part composed of card slots,
a 3U upper part equipped with connectors for external shelf connections.
The panel includes:
1 power filter for power cable (- 48 V1, - 48 V2, - 48 VS) and station alarm (major and minor
alarms) connection,
12 x 3 26-way connectors: 3 connectors are assigned to each slot (3 to 14),
4 x 26-way connectors:
1 connector for alarm information (major or minor) at the RMS interface, two 3-way
relay contacts and three remote monitoring signals,
1 connector for V.24 interface (modem for remote CT function) and P2 management
interface,
1 connector for synchronization signals and line test bus,
1 connector for TMN interface and P1 management interface,
2 x 26-way connectors reserved for later use.
All external connections are made on the equipment front panel on the 3U connection strip. The
interface cards inserted in this shelf may include or not include a front panel. A removable front
cover is used to close the shelf.
The slots are distributed as follows from left to right:
Slots 01 or/and 02 : one or two +5V/11A, -5V/2A, +53V/0,8A, - 53V/1,6A redundant
power converters,
Slots 03 to 14 : general purpose interfaces for any of the interface cards (refer to
table of paragraph 2.5.2),
Slot 15 : Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE-S),
Slot 16 : Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card ("COB"),
Slot 17 : optional COB Card (protection).
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-4
C
O
B

(
S
E
C
U
R
I
S
A
T
I
O
N
)
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
G
I
E
-
S
C
O
B
9
u
n
a
s
s
ig
n
e
d
s
lo
ts
Cover
2
S
H
D
S
L
s
lo
ts
+
Figure 2.2 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX9-S shelf)
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-5
2.2 Front Connection Shelf Description (FMX9-S shelf)
This shelf comprises two parts (see Figure 2.2):
a 7U lower part composed of card slots,
a 3U upper part equipped with connectors for external shelf connections.
The panel includes:
The panel includes:
1 power filter for power cable (- 48 V1, - 48 V2, - 48 VS) and station alarm (major and minor
alarms) connection,
9 x 3 26-way connectors: 3 connectors are assigned to each slot (6 to 14),
6 15-way connectors assigned to slots 3 and 4 :
1 connecteur pour le raccordement des lignes SHDSL,
2 connecteurs pour le raccordement des accs 2 Mbit/s des cartes SHDSL,
1 connecteur pour le raccordement des alarmes SHDSL,
2 connecteurs pour l'exploitation des cartes SHDSL,
1 connector for alarm information (major or minor) at the RMS interface, two 3-way
relay contacts and three remote monitoring signals,
1 connector for V.24 interface (modem for remote CT function) and P2 management
interface,
1 connector for synchronization signals and line test bus,
1 connector for TMN interface and P1 management interface,
2 x 26-way connectors reserved for later use.
All external connections are made on the equipment front panel on the 3U connection strip. The
interface cards inserted in this shelf may include or not include a front panel. A removable front
cover is used to close the shelf.
The slots are distributed as follows from left to right:
Slots 01 or/and 02 : one or two +5V/11A, -5V/2A, +53V/0,8A, - 53V/1,6A redundant
power converters,
Slots 03 and 4 : access for any of the SHDSL connection card,
Slots 6 to 14 : general purpose interfaces for any of the interface cards (refer to
table of paragraph 2.5.2),
Slot 15 : Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE-S),
Slot 16 : Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card ("COB"),
Slot 17 : optional COB Card (protection).
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-6
Reversible mounting brackets
Cover
Motherboard
Converter Shelf
GIE-S Card
COB Card
4 unassigned slots
Figure 2.3 - Front view of the rear connection shelf (FMX4 shelf)
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-7
2.3 Rear Connection Shelf Description (FMX4 shelf)
This shelf comprises two parts (see Figure 2.3) :
a front part composed of card slots,
and a rear part equipped with connectors for external shelf connections.
The slots are distributed as follows:
slot reserved for power supply: - 48 V power converter,
slots 03 to 06: general purpose interface for any of the interface cards
(refer to table of paragraph 2.5.2),
CEU slot reserved for: Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card
("COB"),
CEU slot reserved for: Management and Auxiliary Interface Card ("GIE-S"),
The rear part includes:
16 x 25-way connectors: 3 connectors are assigned to each slot (3 to 6),
. 1 connector for external synchronization,
. 1 connector for V.24 interface (modem access for remote CT function),
. 1 connector for local CT connection,
. 1 connector for synchronization signals and line test bus,
. 2 connectors for P1 and P2 management interfaces,
. 1 connector for TMN interface,
. 1 connector reserved for later use.
a power on/off switch.
All external connections are made on the equipment rear panel. However, CT connection for
local operation may be made on the front panel of the CT of the GIE-S card when the cover is
removed, The interface cards in the FMX4 shelf may include or not include a front panel. A
removable panel is used to close the shelf.
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-8
+53V/0V
+5V/0V
-5V/0V
-53V/0V
Cnvr-P3
Fail
On
Off
Green LED
Switch
Red LED
Yellow LED
Figure 2.4 - Power Converter Card Front Panel
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-9
2.4 Sub-set Description
The different sub-set front panels are equipped with the following controls and LEDs.
Note: The following descriptions only concern common sub-sets (Common Equipment Units
and power converter); refer to volume 2 for port card descriptions. The following power
supply units: the +5V, -5V +53V, -53V power converter (FMX12 and FMX9-S shelves)
and -48 V battery converter (FMX4 shelf) do include a front panel, which is described in
the following paragraphs.
2.4.1 +5 V/11 A, -5 V/2 A, +53 V/0,8 A, -53 V/1,6 A Power
Converter (P3)
The card front panel supports the following from top to bottom (see Figure 2.4):
1 red "Fail" LED no voltage at card output
1 "On/Off" switch Equipment power up/power off
four test points: measure of corresponding voltages.
"+53V/0V",
"+5V/0V",
"-5V/0V",
"-53V/0V".
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-10
ON
OFF
To

53 V Power suooly
motherboard, major and
minor alarm (25-way)
J2 connector
To

5 V and +12V
Power supply
motherboard (9-way)
J1 connector
Fuse
Fixing hole
Earth terminal
(M3 screwed bolt)
-48V Power Supply
25-pin HE 502 connector
Fault Led
Switch
Fixing hole
Cable guide
Front Panel View
Rear Panel View
Figure 2.5 - 48 V battery converter unit
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-11
2.4.2 -48 V battery connector
The -48 V battery converter includes a protective cover (protection on the cable weld side is
provided by the right side panel of the shelf).
The front panel of the converter contains from top to bottom (see Figure 2.5):
1 red "Fault" LED absence of power output,
1 "M-A" (On/Off) switch turning equipment on/off,
2 cables and cable passage orifices (welded at the secondary output power side and
terminated by two SUB D 15 and 25-way male connectors),
The rear panel of this card contains (see Figure 2.5):
a 25-way male SUB D type connector for the primary - 48 V power supply,
a protection fuse,
an earth terminal.
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-12
S
Norm
Mn Alm
Mj Alm
Fail
GIE-S
Norm
Fail
Col
Debug
Modem
Loc
Eth
Rx
Figure 2.6 - GIE-S Card Front Panels
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-13
2.4.3 Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE-S)
This card front panel supports from top to bottom (see Figure 2.6):
1 red "Mj Alm" LED: major alarm,
1 "Norm-Fail" switch: acknowledgment switch associated with a major
alarm,
1 red "Mn Alm" LED: minor alarm,
1 "Norm-Fail" LED: acknowledgment switch associated with a minor
alarm,
- 1 yellow jaune "Col" Eth LED: Ethernet, indicator of collision,
- 1 green "Rx" Eth LED: Ethernet, indicator of activity,
- 1 "Debug" RJ45 connector: Use reserved,
1 "Modem/Loc" switch: CT interface validation, DCE type CT interface
used to manage the FMX locally ("Loc")
(interface on card front panel) or DTE type
interface used to manage the FMX via modem
("Modem") (connection panel or shelf rear panel
depending on shelf used),
1x 25-way connector, local connection of Craft Terminal (CT).
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-14
Figure 2.7 - COB and COB-B Card Front Panels
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-15
2.4.4 Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card
(COB and COB-B)
The front panel of the COB card supports from top to bottom (see Figure 2.7):
1 green "On" LED indication of COB card operational status:
LED lit : COB operational
LED unlit : COB not operational
1 green "Actv" LED indication of COB card (standby or active) status
LED lit : COB active
LED unlit : COB on standby
3 yellow "Sync" LEDs : active synchronization item
"Nom" LED lit : nominal source
"Stdby" LED lit : standby source
"Int" LED lit : internal clock
The front panel of the COB-B card supports in addition, two LEDs dedicated to the
CONFERENCE function (see Figure 2.7):
1 green "Actv" LED : indication of the CONFERENCE function activitity status
LED lit : CONFERENCE Function active on
the COB-B card
LED unlit : CONFERENCE Function idle on the
COB-B card
1 red "Fail" LED : Default indication related to the CONFERENCE function
LED lit : Alarme Indication Signal (AIS) Fail
on a channel for the analog bridges
LED lit : Loss of V.110 Frame Alignment
(LFA) Fail on a channel for the low
rates digital bridges
2 - DESCRIPTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 2-16
2.5 Configurations
2.5.1 Shelf Mode of Operation
There are three types of shelf: the FMX12 shelf, the FMX9-S shelf and the FMX4 shelf.
2.5.2 Card Combination in Shelves
The FMX12 and FMX9-S shelves are front connection shelves while the FMX4 shelf is rear
connection shelf.
The table below lists the interfaces cards usable in each of the different shelves:
CARD FMX12SHELF
ou FMX9-S
FMX4 SHELF
2MU YES YES
V24/V28 YES YES
4VAS YES YES
3 64 I YES YES
6PAFC YES YES
V24/V11(V10) YES YES
2w2B1Q (Subscriber) YES YES
2w2B1Q (Network) YES YES
2w2B1Q (TRANSMIC Extension) YES YES
BBTxRx YES YES
A2S YES YES
4U Transfix (1) YES YES
Subscr YES YES
Exchan YES YES
Exch12 YES NO
CONF YES (2) YES
IADB YES (4) YES (3)
ETH YES (4) YES (3)
ADPCM YES (5) YES (5)
Power converter (P3) YES NO
-48V battery converter NO YES
(1) : When a 4U TRANSFIX card is used, a COB card with 5 ppm option must be used.
(2) : Card number is limited to 6.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-1
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION - START-UP
AND OPERATION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-2
3.
3 - FMX12 SHELF INSTALLATION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-3
Safety warnings are listed on the introductory page "SAFETY WARNINGS".
The purpose of this section is to describe equipment implementation and operation under
normal operating conditions.
The FMX may be installed in for types of shelves:
- a front-connection shelf (10U), called the FMX12 Central Office shelf, to be installed in a ETSI
rack-mounting shelf or a 19" rack-mounting shelf as described in sub-section 3.1,
- a front-connection shelf (10U), called the FMX9-S Central Office shelf, to be installed in a
ETSI rack-mounting shelf or a 19" rack-mounting shelf as described in sub-section 3.2,
- a rear connection shelf(4U), called the FMX4 shelf, to be installed in a 19" rack-mounting shelf
or on a table as described in sub-section 3.3.
The implementation proposed includes:
- the installation and description of connections for each type of shelf,
- equipment start-up and configuration.
The operating functions described are the functions accessible to the operator during operation
and whose use has an impact on the general operation of the equipment; these functions
essentially concern system data changes such as mode of operation, synchronization etc.,
monitoring functions and loopbacks.
The upgrade paragraph defines the precautionary measures to be taken and constraints to be
respected when the physical configuration is modified during operation (addition and removal of
a port card etc.).
NOTE: The detailed description of the user software and its different functions are
found in Users Manual No. 252 938 382-x where x represents the edition
number.
This equipment may only be installed in cabinets, shelves or racks whose lower part is closed
or equipped with a minimum HF1 fire-classification air filter, or resting on an flame-proof floor.
IMPORTANT: All circuits are Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits except for the
type Z, U, BBTxRx and 2W/4W with E/M signaling circuits which are TNV
(Telecommunications Network Voltage) type circuits.
SELV type circuits must be connected to SELV type circuits.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-4
3 2
1
1
3 2
Cover
* :Representation of the reversible mounting brackets for the 19" Rack
Reversible
Mounting bracket
Reversible
Mounting bracket
Cylinder head stainless steel
screw (M3x4)
Flat stainless steel washer
(M3)
screw (M3x4)
Flat stainless steel washer (M3)
Figure 3.1 - FMX 12 Shelf - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19 or ETSI Rack
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-5
3.1 Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX12 Shelf)
The shelf may be installed in CEPT Type 80, M3 or 19or ETSI rack-mounting shelves.
NOTE: The specific rack environment adapter kits, power supply filter and cables are
supplied on request.
3.1.1 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation
19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
Item Description Quantity
1
2
3
19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf
assembly kit
. Reversible Adapter bracket,
. CLS M3x4 screws
. Stainless steel flat M3 washer
2
6
6
Table 3.1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
The reversible adapter brackets are designed for either 19" or ETSI rack-mounting; simply
loosen the shelf fixings (unscrew the three attachment screws of the reversible adapter
brackets) and rotate them from left to right for the left bracket and from right to left for the right
bracket to the vertical.
Mounting Part Assembly (Figure 3.1)
On the left side of the shelf:
- Position the reversible adapter brackets (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure
using 3 stainless steel CLS M3x4 screws (item 2) and 3 stainless steel M3 flat washers
(item 3).
Repeat the operation on the right side of the shelf.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-6
5
4
6U
3U

2
0
0

(
E
T
S
I

R
a
c
k
)
1
9
0
.
5

(
1
9
"

R
a
c
k
)
2 cage
nuts (M6)
SHELF
Connection
panel
L-H side
vertical member
Hexagonal head
st. steel screw (M6x12)
Figure 3.2 - FMX 12 shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-7
Shelf Mounting in 19" or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf (Figure 3.2)
The mounting of the shelf in the 19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf is provided for indicative
purposes; the parts used to mount the shelf in the rack-mounting shelves (brackets, cage nuts
etc.) specific to them are not supplied.
Assembly principle:
- provide for an available space of 10U,
- position the support brackets inside the rear of the rack-mounting shelf (lower level of shelf)
and secure,
- secure the 2 M6 cage nuts (item 5) on either side of the shelf,
- position the empty shelf at the rear of the rack-mounting shelf and place on the support
brackets,
- slide it in until the shelf reversible adapter brackets come in contact with the shelf risers,
secure using the cage nuts and M6 x 12 hex-head screws (item 4).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-8
-48V
-48V1
-48V2
-48S
-48VS
Secondary
voltages
Protecti on OB1
Protecti on OB2
Protecti on
OBS
Primary
voltages
Service GND
POWER
EQUIPMENT
Fail
Power converter
ALARMS
VIS MAJ ALM
0V
Chassi s
ground
Terti ary
voltages
VIS MIN ALM
AUD MAJ ALM
AUD MIN ALM
Major alarm
Minor alarm
EQUIPMENT
The relays are closed when
the alarm is present.
Visual
Audible
Visual
Audible
Power supply filter
J1 connector
Servi ce GND
Servi ce GND
Figure 3.3 - Station Power Distribution Principle
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-9
3.1.2 Power Distribution and Supply
Station power distribution is shown in Figure 3.3.
Setting up the Power Supply Filter
The shelf is supplied without a power supply filter; it is compulsory however to guarantee
that EMC standards are met.
Setting up the Filter:
- remove the filter support cover,
- plug in the power supply filter card on the connection panel,
- connect the power cable to connector J1 (HE501, 25-way male) on the power supply filter,
connector pin options are shown in Table 3.2 below.
Power Supply Filter J1 Connector Pin Options Signal Name
1-------------------------------------------- -48V2
14---------------------- -48V2
2--------------------------------------------- -48V2
15---------------------- -48V2
3--------------------------------------------- -48V1
16---------------------- -48V1
4--------------------------------------------- -48V1
17---------------------- -48V1
5--------------------------------------------- ALA MN*
18---------------------- Service GND
6--------------------------------------------- Service GND
19---------------------- MN* ALM
7--------------------------------------------- MJ* ALM
20---------------------- -48S
8--------------------------------------------- -48S
21---------------------- MJ* ALM
9--------------------------------------------- GND2 (GND1)*
22---------------------- OB1 (OB2)*
10------------------------------------------- GND2 (GND1)*
23---------------------- OB1 (OB2)*
11------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
24---------------------- 0V/MGND
12------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
25---------------------- 0V/MGND
13------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
* power supply filters (5 = MN ALM, 7 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND2, 19 = 21 = Not connected
and 22 = 23 = GND1).
Sound and visual alarm power supply filters (5 = 19 = MN ALM, 7 = 21 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 =
GND1, 22 = 23 = OB2). Seen from PABB, 5 = ALA MN sound, 19 = MN ALM visual, 7 = MJ
ALM sound et 21 = MJ Alm visual.
Table 3.2 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter
NOTE: Two switches located on the front panel of the GIE-S card are used to disable
major and minor alarms even when the GIE-S card is not powered. The table
below provides the status of the LEDs and alarms according to switch position.
SWITCH POSITION ALARM
(MaJor or MiNor)
ALARM
LEDs
ALARM STATUS
(Major or Minor)
Low (fault mode) Absent Lit Sce GND
High (normal mode) Unlit Open
Low (fault mode) Present Lit Open
High (normal mode) Lit Sce GND
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
P101A
P102B
Connector
with 6.35
faston contacts
Power filter
Power and Alarm
bus Bar
(PABB)
Front-end connection access shelf
Figure 3.4 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting
Shelves
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-11
Power Distribution in Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves
A Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) is used to supply power to the different shelves installed
in a type 80 or 19 rack-mounting shelves. It is secured on the left side, outside the type 80
rack-mounting shelves or inside the 19 rack-mounting shelves. The PABB is powered by a
Frame Protection Unit (FPU) or a Alarm and Frame Protection Unit (AFPU) located in the upper
part of the rack-mounting shelf.
The shelf is powered via the PABB by a 70 cm power cable connected on its power supply filter
and equipped shelf-side with an HE 501 female (25-way) connector. There are two versions of
the cable differentiated by their end-PABB side:
- "Y" cable (ref. 6489281) equipped with 2 7-way connectors (FASTON type) with insertion key,
two wires are reserved for central office alarm transmission: one for the major central office
alarm and the other for the minor central office alarm (alarm detection is indicated by the
presence of a service GND).
L = 70 cm
3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
P101A
P102B
A
B
5
4
1
2
3
4
J1 2 1
A
B
6013235
5
Shelf side
BDA side
Chassis ground
Major Alarm Extn
Cable
Cable no.
Connector (25-way female )
Connectors wi th - 6.35 faston contacts
Power supply
filter
-48V1 power supply voltage
Signal ground for -48V1 (Sig Gnd 1)
Chassis ground
Minor Alarm Extn
Service ground
-48VS service voltage
Figure 3.5 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors
(Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves)
- the cable (ref. 6012721) is equipped with a single 7-way connector (FASTON type) with
insertion key: a single wire is reserved for central office alarm transmission (alarm detection is
indicated by the presence of a service ground).
L = 70 cm
3
2
6012721
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
4
1
2
3
4
J1
Ali/PWR
BDA side
Cable
Cable no.
Shelf side
Power supply
filter
Chassis ground
Major and Minor Alarm Extn
Signal ground
Service ground
Connector (25-way female)
Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
Figure 3.6 - Power Cable equipped with one 7-way Connector
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-12
J101
J102 J103 J104 J105 J106 J107 J108 J109
J120 J121
J110 J111 J112 J113 J114
J122
J
1
2
3
J115 J116 J117
LED/DEL
Ala/Alm
-48VS
OBS
Ala DsJ
Ala MJ1
Ala MJ2
Ala Mn1
Ala Mn2
Mm/Gnd
TB2 TB1
Mm/Gnd
J118
1234
J119
12345678
1234
1234567812345678
3 2 1
OBS
Z
Y
J1
J2
J102
J1
J103 J104 J105
J110 J111 J112
J117 J118 J119
J124 J125 J126
J131 J132 J133
J138 J139 J140 J141 J142 J143
J134 J135 J136
J127 J128 J129
J120 J121 J122
J113 J114 J115
J106 J107 J108
J102
J109
J123
J130
J137
J116
J103 J104 J105
J110 J111 J112
J117 J118 J119
J124 J125 J126
J131 J132 J133
J138 J139 J140 J141 J142 J143
J134 J135 J136
J127 J128 J129
J120 J121 J122
J113 J114 J115
J106 J107 J108
J109
J123
J130
J137
J116
POWER
SUPPLY
FILTER
PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 Distribution Card
Power Supply Cable
CONNECTION PANEL
S
l
o
t

1
S
l
o
t

3
S
l
o
t

4
S
l
o
t

5
S
l
o
t

6
S
l
o
t

7
S
l
o
t

8
S
l
o
t

9
S
l
o
t

1
0
S
l
o
t

1
1
S
l
o
t

1
2
S
l
o
t

1
3
S
l
o
t

1
4
S
l
o
t

1
5
S
l
o
t

1
6
S
l
o
t

1
7
S
l
o
t

2
Figure 3.7 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-13
M3 or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf Power Distribution
The power distribution principle for the M3 or ETSI is provided in User Manual PAPA G2
(PAPE G2) GU - N5671477XXYY (XX = Version and YY = Edition) and Figure 3.7.
The Remote Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PPAP G2) or (RPAP G2) is located in the
upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes a distribution card which allows:
- the protection of secondary voltages (PPAP only) from the power unit of the station and the
distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 25 A circuit-breakers to the equipment (the
calibration of the -48V is 2 A,
- the grouping of major and minor alarms from the rack-mounting shelf equipment and circuit
breaker alarms and the transmission of station alarm loops (major and minor),
- the display of station alarms (major, minor, circuit breaking) and the presence of -48V/Sce
GND signaling voltage.
The shelf is connected to the PPAP G2 or RPAP G2 by a power cable equipped with a female
HE 501 (25-way) connector at each end and fitted to the power supply filter.
The cable may either measure 1.30 meters (ref.: 6012262) and 2.5 meters (ref.: 6012261).
1
2
3 3
2 1
Ali/PWR
J1
6012261
3
Cable
HE5 connector (25-way female)
PAPA G2 side
Power
supply filter
Shelf side
Cable no.
L = 1.3 or 2.5m
Figure 3.8 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable
"Universal" Power Cable
The cable is used to power the FMX in previously undefined environments is 3 meters long; it is
equipped with an HE 501 connector (25-way) at one end, the other end being determined
according to use.
1
2
3 3
2 1
Ali/PWR
J1
L = 3m
6012711 Free ends
Cable
Cable no.
Shelf side
Power supply
filter
Power supply side
Figure 3.9 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf)
The 19 wires are identified with rings mentioning the name of the signal.
-48VS : Purple-White -48V1 : Black, Green,
Blue- White
-48V2 : Red, Blue, Red-white
OB1 : Brown, yellow OB2 : Brown-White,
Yellow- White
OBS : Black-White
AUD MAJ ALM : Orange AUD MIN ALM : Purple
VIS MAJ ALM : Orange-White VIS MIN ALM : Green-White
Service GND : Grey, Grey-White, White
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-14
J
1
0
1
J
1
0
3
J
1
0
4
J
1
0
5
J
1
1
0
J
1
1
1
J
1
1
2
J
1
1
7
J
1
1
8
J
1
1
9
J
1
2
4
J
1
2
5
J
1
2
6
J
1
3
1
J
1
3
2
J
1
3
3
J
1
3
8
J
1
3
9
J
1
4
0
J
1
4
1
J
1
4
2
J
1
4
3
J
1
3
4
J
1
3
5
J
1
3
6
J
1
2
7
J
1
2
8
J
1
2
9
J
1
2
0
J
1
2
1
J
1
2
2
J
1
1
3
J
1
1
4
J
1
1
5
J
1
0
6
J
1
0
7
J
1
0
8
J
1
0
2
J
1
0
9
J
1
2
3
J
1
3
0
J
1
3
7
J
1
1
6
J
1
4
J
1
1
J
8
J
5
J
2
6
J
2
3
J
2
0
J
1
7
J
2
9
J
4
1
J
3
8
J
3
5
J
3
2
J
4
7
J
4
4
J
1
J
3
J
1
5
J
1
2
J
9
J
6
J
2
7
J
2
4
J
2
1
J
1
8
J
3
0
J
4
2
J
3
9
J
3
6
J
3
3
J
4
8
J
4
5
J
2
J
4
J
1
6
J
1
3
J
1
0
J
7
J
2
8
J
2
5
J
2
2
J
1
9
J
3
1
J
4
3
J
4
0
J
3
7
J
3
4
J
4
9
J
4
6
1
2

P
o
r
t

C
a
r
d
s

s
l
o
t
s
P
O
W
E
R

S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
l
o
t

1
5
S
l
o
t

1
7
S
l
o
t

3
S
l
o
t

5
S
l
o
t

7
S
l
o
t

9
S
l
o
t

1
1
S
l
o
t

1
3
S
l
o
t

4
S
l
o
t

6
S
l
o
t

8
S
l
o
t

1
0
S
l
o
t

1
2
S
l
o
t

1
4
S
l
o
t

1
6
S l o t 1
S l o t 2
S l o t 3
S l o t 4
S l o t 5
S l o t 6
S l o t 7
S l o t 8
S l o t 9
S l o t 1 0
S l o t 1 1
S l o t 1 2
S l o t 1 3
S l o t 1 4
S l o t 1 5
S l o t 1 6
S l o t 1 7
Figure 3.10 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX 12 Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-15
3.1.3 Connection Description
External equipment connections are performed on the front panel of the shelf on the upper
panel. The different equipment cards are plugged into the lower part of the shelf in slots 1 to 17.
Only the common equipment cards and power converters have pre-determined locations; the
type of card which is or is not present in slots 03 to 14 depends on the configuration selected by
the operator.
This paragraph specifies the connectors associated with each slot (in particular the general
purpose slots) and, for each type of port, the nature of the signals, connector pin assignments
and cables proposed.
3.1.3.1 Slot/Connector Association
The table below defines the allocation of each connector on the connection panel and specifies
the distribution of line access connectors according to the slots (refer to Figure 3.10).
Slot numbers Card Name Connection Panel Connectors
(external ports)
01
02
+5V, -5V,
+53V, -53V power converters
J101: Power Supply Filter
03
Port cards (optional):
- 3 64 I
Connector Grouping
J102 J109 J116
04 - BBTxRx J123 J130 J137
05 - 2MU, J103 J110 J117
06 - A2S (A2S - IV, A2S-IV-S), J124 J131 J138
07 - 6PAFC, J104 J111 J118
08 - V24/V11, J125 J132 J139
09 - V24/V28 or 4VAS, J105 J112 J119
10 - 2w2B1Q, J126 J133 J140
11 - Subscr J106 J113 J120
12 - Exchan J127 J134 J141
13 - Exch12, CONF J107 J114 J121
14 - 4U TRANSFIX, IADB or ETH. J128 J135 J142
15 Operations Interface Card (GIE-S)
16* COnnections, Timing Circuit and
Synchronization (COB)
17 COB (standby)
J108: Loops - Alarms
J115: SYNCH
J122: CT - P2
J129: TMN - P1
: General purpose slots
* When there is no protection, the COB card is plugged into slot 16.
Table 3.3 - Slot/Connector Association
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-16
3.1.3.2 Line Port Signals
The distribution of signals on line port connectors is provided in the tables below; the nature of
the information transmitted is specified according to the type of card located in the associated
slot, a detailed view of the connection panel is shown in Figure 3.10.
Interpretation of Symbols Used
Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2)
designate the 2 transmission wires for interface no. i on the balanced pair; this designation is
used when the card plugged into the slot includes several interfaces.
Ex: Tx L (3-1) | 2 transmission wires
Tx L (3-2)
|
on interface no. 3
For single interface cards (2MU, etc.) only interface no. 1 is used (i = 1).
Ex: Tx L (1-1)
Tx L (1-2)
Connectors Associated with General Purpose Slots
Type of connectors: SUB D high density 26-way.
The tables below specify the use of the connector contacts according to card type.
- Table 3.4 : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with
6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB or ETH cards,
- Table 3.5: : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with
V24/V11, V24/V28 or 4VAS cards,
- Table 3.6 : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with Subscr,
Exchan or Exch12 cards,
BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX cards.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-17
Connection Panel Top Connector:
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
6PAFC 3 64 I IADB ETH
10---------------------------------- M A(3) Rx L Sig (3.1) Rx L (3.2)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(3) Rx L Sig(3.2) Rx L (3.1)
19--------------------- E B(6) Tx L (2.2)
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(3) Tx L Sig (3.1) Rx L (4.4)
20--------------------- E A(6) Rx L (2.2)
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(3) Tx L Sig (3.2) Rx L (4.2)
21--------------------- M B(6) RX+ () Rx L (2.2)
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(6) RX- () Rx L (2.1)
14---------------------------------- TX+ ()
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.2) Tx L (3.2) Tx L (4.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (6.2) Rx L (1.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.1) Tx L (3.1) Tx L (4.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (6.1) Rx L (1.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.2) Rx L (3.2) Tx L (3.1)
26--------------------- Rx L (6.2) Tx L (1.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (6.1) Tx L (1.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.1) Rx L (3.1) Tx L (3.2)
Connection Panel Middle Connector:
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
10---------------------------------- M A(2) Rx L Sig (2.1)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(2) Rx L Sig(2.2)
19--------------------- E B(5)
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(2) Tx L Sig (2.1)
20--------------------- E A(5)
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(2) Tx L Sig (2.2)
21--------------------- M B(5) RX+ ()
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(5) RX- ()
14---------------------------------- TX+ () Not Used
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.2) Tx L (2.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (5.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.1) Tx L (2.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (5.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.2) Rx L (2.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (5.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (5.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.1) Rx L (2.1)
Connection Panel Bottom Connector:
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
10---------------------------------- M A(1) Rx L Sig (1.1)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(1) Rx L Sig(1.2)
19--------------------- E B(4)
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(1) Tx L Sig (1.1)
20--------------------- E A(4)
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(1) Tx L Sig (1.2)
21--------------------- M B(4) RX+ () RX+ ()
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/ MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(4) RX- () RX- ()
14---------------------------------- TX+ () TX+ ()
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- () TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.2) Tx L (1.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (4.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (4.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (4.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (4.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.1) Rx L (1.1)
Table 3.4 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-18
Connection Panel Top Connector
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J3) 106 (J4) 106 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J3) 108 (J3) 108 (J3)
19---------------------- 106a (J3)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101 J3) 101 (J3) 101 (J3)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J3) 107 (J3) 107 (J3)
20---------------------- 140 (J3) 140 (J4) 140 (J4)
12------------------------------------ 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J3) 106 (J3) 106 (J3)
21---------------------- 105b (J3) 140 (J3) 140 (J3)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107 (J3)
22---------------------- 105a (J3)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J3) 102 (J3) 102 (J3)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J3) 142 (J3) 142 (J3)
23---------------------- 141 (J3) 141 (J3) 141 (J3)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J3) 102 (J4) 102 (J4)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J3) 109 (J3) 109 (J3)
24---------------------- 115b (J3) 115 (J4) 104 RB (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J3)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J3) 104 (J3) 104 RA (J3)
25---------------------- 115a (J3) 115 (J3) 104 RB (J3)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J3)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J3) 105 (J3) 105 (J3)
26---------------------- 114b (J3) 114 (J4) 103 TA (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J3) 114 (J3) 103 TA (J3)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J3) 103 (J3) 103 TB (J3)
Connection Panel Middle Connector
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J2) 109 (J4) 109 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J2) 108 (J2) 108 (J2)
19---------------------- 106 (J2) 142 (J4) 142 (J4)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101 J2) 101 (J2) 101 (J2)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J2) 107 (J2) 107 (J2)
20---------------------- 140 (J2)
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J2) 106 (J2) 106 (J2)
21---------------------- 105b (J2) 140 (J2) 140 (J2)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107 (J2)
22---------------------- 105a (J2)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J2) 102 (J2) 102 (J2)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J2) 142 (J2) 142 (J2)
23---------------------- 141 (J2) 141 (J2) 141 (J2)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J2)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J2) 109 (J2) 109 (J2)
24---------------------- 115b (J2) 107 (J4) 107 (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J2)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J2) 104 (J2) 104 RA (J2)
25---------------------- 115a (J2) 115 (J2) 104 RB (J2)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J2)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J2) 105 (J2) 105 (J2)
26---------------------- 114b (J2) 108 (J4) 108 (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J2) 114 (J2) 103 TA (J2)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J2) 103 (J2) 103 TB (J2)
Connection Panel Bottom Connector
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J1) 105 (J4) 105 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J1) 108 (J1) 108 (J1)
19---------------------- 106 (J1)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101J1) 101 (J1) 101 (J1)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J1) 107 (J1) 107 (J1)
20---------------------- 140 (J1)
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J1) 106 (J1) 106 (J1)
21---------------------- 105b (J1) 140 (J1) 140 (J1)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107a (J1)
22---------------------- 105a (J1)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J1) 102 (J1) 102 (J1)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J1) 142 (J1) 142 (J1)
23---------------------- 141 (J1) 141 (J1) 141 (J1)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J1) 141 (J4) 141 (J4)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J1) 109 (J1) 109 (J1)
24---------------------- 115b (J1) 104 (J4) 104 RA (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J1)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J1) 104 (J1) 104 RA (J1)
25---------------------- 115a (J1 115 (J1) 104 RB (J1)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J1)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J1 105 (J1) 105 (J1)
26---------------------- 114b (J1) 103 (J4) 103 TB (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J1) 114 (J1) 103 TA (J1)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J1) 103 (J1) 103 TB (J1)
Table 3.5 - V24/V11, V24/V28 and 4VAS Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-19
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA3 LA3
1---------------------------------------------------- LB3 LB3
19--------------------- LB10
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA4 LA4
20--------------------- LA10
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB4 LB4
21--------------------- LB9
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA9
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA2 LA2
1---------------------------------------------------- LB2 LB2
19--------------------- LB11
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA5 LA5
20--------------------- LA11
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB5 LB5
21--------------------- LB8
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA8
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA1 LA1
1---------------------------------------------------- LB1 LB1
19--------------------- LB12
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA6 LA6
20--------------------- LA12
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB6 LB6
21--------------------- LB7
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA7
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
Table 3.6 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-20
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
BB TxRx 2MU A2S 2w2B1Q or
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
11----------------------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
12----------------------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
13----------------------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
14---------------------------------- Unused Unused Unused
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.2)
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.1)
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.2)
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.1)
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
11----------------------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
12----------------------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
13----------------------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.2) U (4.2)*
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.1) U (4.1)*
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.2) U (3.2)*
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.1) U (3.1)*
J116 J121/J137 J142
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.2)(Out L.2) Tx L (1.2) Tx L (1.2) U (2.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (4.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.1)(Out L.1) Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1) U (2.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (4.1)
17---------------------------------- Screen (Rx) Screen (Rx) Screen (Rx) Screen
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.2)(In L.2) Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2) U (1.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (4.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (4.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.1)(In L.1) Rx L (1.1) Rx L (1.1) U (1.1)
* : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
Table 3.7 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-21
Cables Used
Cable selection is specific to the type of signals connected and number of same type of
connections to be made. One same cable, called the "universal cable" can be separated on
several cards in the same shelf, or on several ports of the same card.
Cable references are in accordance with their length. These cables are described below.
Key to signal names: Px; Pair no., Qx; Quad no.,
Cables for BBTxRx and A2ME
The cables used for the BBTxRx and A2ME cards are identified in the following table. According
to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No
55050109 Link cable (Equipment / Connection area) 2,5 m 55670104
(Quantity : 1/card) 5 m 55670105
12 m 55670106
24.8m 55670107
1
2
3
2
A
B
4
4
3
55050109
1
L
B
A
WH
VT
GY
WH
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2
BU
VT
BU
GY
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Cable
HE5 connector (26-way male)
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Card Connector port
BBTxRx
Channel 1
Connection
panel
connector
Bottom
A2ME
Channel 1
Bottom
Figure 3.11 - Connection cable for BBTxRx and A2MEcards (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-22
Cables for the A2S card
The cables used for the four ports of the A2S card are identified in the following table.
According to the type of engineering to be respected, the user will choose among these three
options.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050105 1 cable for 4 120 ports 2,5 m 55670088
5 m 55670089
12 m 55670090
24.8 m 55670091
1 lot of cables for four male BNC 75 ports
including:
55680317
one 75 adaptater cable (two ports) 1.5 m 55670675
two 75 adaptater cable (one port) 1.5 m 55670676
1 lot of cables for four female BNC 75
ports including:
55680310
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-23
A3
A2 A3
1
2
3
4
2
55050105 A
B
A2
A1
B
A
B
A A
B
B
A
4
3 1
L
A1
GY
YE
YE
GY
VT
BU
BU
VT
VT
BN
VT
BN
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P2
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P2
Q2 - P2
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
GY
WH
GY
WH
Cable
HE5 Connectors (26-way male)
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Legend :
A Tx L 2Mbit/s
B Rx L 2Mbit/s
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
TOP
Figure 3.12 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-24
500 mm
B1
B2
B
C
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
6
5
4
3
16
20
25
14
17
11
Rec L2/
Rec L3
Em L2/
Em L3
B1
B2
Em L2/Em L3
Rec L2/Rec L3
3
4
C
B
A
Item
Marking
In Rec L2
Out Em L2
Wiring diagram
Coaxial female BNC connectors
Cable
Cable identification
HE5 Connector (26-way male)
Connection
panel side
(middle/top)
See table
Green wire
connecting
the coaxial cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
55670609
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L3
Out Em L3
middle top
55670609
2 Mbit/s port
Figure 3.13 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-25
500 mm
B1
B2
B3
B4
B
C
D
E
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
5
4
3
16
20
25
14
17
11
Em L4
Rec L4
Rec L1
Em L1
B1
B2
B3
B4
Em L1
Em L4
Rec L1
Rec L4
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
Item
Marking Low
55670xxx
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L1
In Rec L4
Out Em L4
Out Em L1
Wiring diagram
Cable
Connection
panel side
(bottom)
See table
Green wire
connecting
the coaxial cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
Figure 3.14 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-26
Cables for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q card
The cables used for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q cards are identified in the following table.
According to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
Card Quantity
55050106 Connection cable for the 2.5 m 55670092 1 for 2w2B1Q
4U TRANSFIX et 2w2B1Q cards 5 m 55670093 2 for 4UTRANSFIX
12 m 55670094
24.8 m 55670095
1
2
3
1
2
4
55050106
1
10
19
26
18
9
L
4
Q1 -P1
Q1 -P2
3
WH
BU
VT
GY
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable Part No.
Cable reference
(length depending)
Connection panel side
Middle connector: channel 3 et channel 4
Bottom connector: channel 1 et channel 2
Figure 3.15 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-27
Cables for the Exch12card
The cables used for the Exch12 card are identified in the following table. According to the type
of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050111 Connection cable for the Exch12 card 2.5 m 55670112
(Quantity : 1/ card) 5 m 55670113
12 m 55670114
24.8 m 55670115
A3
1
2
3
4
2
55050111
A2
A1
4
3 1
L
A1
55050111
P10
P9
P3
P4
A2
P11
P8
P2
P5
A3
P12
P7
P1
P6
BK
BK
BN
GN
BN
WH
WH
OG OG
RD
BU
WH
BK
BN
RD
GN
BK
RD
GN
BN BU
OG
RD
WH
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
TOP
Cable
Cable Part No.
Cable reference
(length depending)
Connection
panel side
Free ends
Wiring diagram
Figure 3.16 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-28
Cables for the 3 64 I card
The cables used for the 3 64 I card are identified in the following table. According to the type of
engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length Code No.
55050123 Connection cable for the 3J64 card 2.5 m 55670135
12 m 55670137
24.8 m 55670138
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050123
A
B
C
C
Q1 - P2
B
A
1
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
L
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
C
Q2 - P2
B
A
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
Q2 - P1
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P2
C
Q3 - P2
B
A
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
Q3 - P1
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P1
GY
BK
VT
RD
GY
YE
GY
GY
YE
VT
BN
VT
BU
VT
GY
WH
VT
BU
WH
GY
WH
GY
YE
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Wiring diagram
T
O
P
MIDDLE
B
O
T
T
O
M
Figure 3.17 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-29
Cables for the V.24/V28 or 4VAS card
The cables used for the V24/V28 or 4VAS card (in V28 operating mode) are identified in the
following table. According to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std.
Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
N code
Card
Quantity
Connection cable for the V24/V28 card
Connection of one DTE Cable for 1 channel 2.5 m 6 012 545 1 to 3
Connection of four DTE Cable for 4 channels 2.5 m 6 012 547 1
DCE/ DTE Adapter (used on cable
no.6012547)(1/channel)
0.30 m 6 012 546
Connection of one DCE Cable for 1 channel 2.5 m 55670144 1 to 3
Connection of four DCE Cable for 4 channels 2.5 m 55670143 1
1
2
3
2
6012546
30 cm
3
3
1
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
Connection
of one DCE
Cable
Cable number
Wiring diagram
DCE
mode
DTE
mode
To cable
no. 6 012 547
Figure 3.18 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 or 4VAS Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-30
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
102
142
109
104
105
103
106
140
141
115
22
101
114
115
141
107
108
140
106
142
102
103
105
104
109
108
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012545
3
4
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
21
Cable
Connection
panel side
HE5 Connector (25-way female)
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Connection
of one DTE
Figure 3.19 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-31
Cable four DTEs
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012547
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J3)
102 (J3)
142 (J3)
109 (J3)
104 (J3)
105 (J3)
103 (J3)
22
108 (J3)
J4
J3
J2
J1
140 (J3)
106 (J3)
106 (J4)
101 (J3)
140 (J4)
102 (J4)
141 (J3)
115 (J3)
115 (J4)
114 (J4)
114 (J3)
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J2)
102 (J2)
142 (J2)
109 (J2)
104 (J2)
105 (J2)
103 (J2)
22
108 (J2)
140 (J2)
106 (J2)
109 (J4)
101 (J2)
141 (J2)
115 (J2)
107 (J4)
108 (J4)
114 (J2)
142 (J4)
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J1)
102 (J1)
142 (J1)
109 (J1)
104 (J1)
105 (J1)
103 (J1)
13
108 (J1)
140 (J1)
106 (J1)
105 (J4)
101 (J1)
141 (J4)
141 (J1)
115 (J1)
104 (J4)
103 (J4)
114 (J1)
101 (J4)
114
115
141
108
140
142
J4 J3
114
115
141
108
140
142
3
4
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
142
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
J2
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
142
J1
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
HE5 Connectors (25-way female)
Wiring diagram
Middle
Top
Bottom
2.50 m
TOP
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Figure 3.20 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-32
1
2
3
4
2
55670144
1
10
19
2
21
14
15
23
24
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
1
3
4
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103
Q3 - P1
101 Q4 - P1
141 Q3 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
101 Q4 - P1
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
140 Q1 - P1
102 Q1 - P2
105 Q3 - P1
108 Q2 - P1
109 Q2 - P2
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Connection
of one DCE
DTE
mode
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-33
Cable four DCEs
1
2
3
2
4
1
55670143
3
4
J4
1
10 19
2
20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
106
Q1 - P1
141 Q3 - P2
102
114
Q1 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
140
101 Q4 - P1
J3
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J3
1
10
19
2
20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
106
Q2 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
107
108
Q2 - P1
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
142
101 Q4 - P1
J2
J2
J4
J4
J2
1
10 19
2 20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
105
Q4 - P1
104
Q3 - P2 141
103 Q3 - P1
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
101
101 Q4 - P1
J1
J1
J4
J4
141 Q3 - P2
J1
Q3 - P1
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J3
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J2
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J1
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
Cable
Cable number
HE5 Connectors
(26-way male)
Connection
panel side
HE5 Connectors
(25-way male)
Wiring diagram
Middle
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Middle
J4
J3
J2
J1
2.50 m
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Figure 3.22 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-34
Cables for 4VAS card
Recall : If 4VAS card is exploited in V28 mode, the cables defined previously for V24/V28
card can be used.
The cables used for the 4VAS card are identified in the following table. According to the type of
Std Plan No. Designation Length Code No.
Card
Quantity
251757845 1/2 connection cable for 2.5 m 251757973
1 interface 4VAS card - FMX12 5 m 251757994 1 to 3
12 m 251758016
251757832 1//2 connection cable for 2.5 m 251758024
4 interfaces 4VAS card - FMX12 5 m 251758037 1
12 m 251758045
Remark: In RS485 2 wires Operation mode, the active signals are 104RA / 104RB.
108
101
107
106
141
142
109
104 RA
104 RB
105 (J2)
103 TA
103 TB
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
26 PTS M
P9
P10
1 2 3 4 7 8 7
4VAS
25
L
= =
4VAS
GY
GY
GN
VT
BK
VT
GN
VT
GY
WH
VT BU
VT
YE
GY
YE
See detail
END A
Braid connected
to the connector cap
END B
WIRING SIDE VIEW
0V/MGND
140
0V/MGND
102
END A END B
Braid connected
Figure 3.23 - 1/2 cable for 1 interface connection of the 4VAS card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-35
101 (J3)
140 (J3)
107 (J3)
106 (J3)
141 (J3)
142 (J3)
108 (J3)
109 (J3)
104RA (J3)
104RB (J3)
103TA (J3)
103TB (J3)
105 (J3)
Q4-P1
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1
26 PTS M
Q4-P2
Q6-P1
Q5-P1
Q7-P2
Q8-P1
102 (J3)
106 (J4)
102 (J4)
140 (J4)
104RB (J4)
103TA (J4)
26 PTS M
26 PTS M
109 (J4)
107 (J4)
107 (J2)
141 (J2)
142 (J2)
108 (J2)
109 (J2)
104RA (J2)
104RB (J2)
103TA (J2)
103TB (J2)
Q3-P1
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Q4-P1
Q4-P2
140 (J1)
108 (J1)
101 (J1)
107 (J1)
106 (J1)
102 (J1)
142 (J1)
104RB (J1)
104RA (J1)
103TA (J1)
103TB (J1)
109 (J1)
105 (J1)
Q2-P1
Q4-P1
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1
105 (J4)
141 (J4)
104RA (J4)
103TB (J4) Q8-P2
Q7-P1
Q4-P2
Q5-P2
1 2 3 4
6
6
500
25
200
L
25 30 20
8
25
8 8 8
7
7
8
6
7
J1
J2
J3
J4
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4VAS
Q6-P2
Q3-P2
Q5-P2
Q2-P2
108 (J4)
142 (J4)
106 (J2)
140 (J2)
102 (J2)
101 (J2)
105 (J2)
VT
GY
VT
YE
VT
YE
GY
GY
GN
VT
GY
BK
BN
WH
VT
VT
GY
BU
VT
VT
VT
RD
GY
BK
BN
VT
GY
GN
GY
BK
YE
WH
VT
BU
GY
WH
GY
GY
GN
VT
RD
GY
BK
YE
BU
VT
VT
GY
WH
VT
GY
VT
GY
WH
OG
LOW
HIGH
END A
4VAS HIGH
Braid connected
WIRING SCHEDULE
END B
To J3
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
To J4
To J2
To J2
4VAS MIDDLE
4VAS LOW
END A END B
See detail 2
See detail 1
Figure 3.24 - 1/2 cable for 4 interfaces connection of the 4VAS card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-36
Cables for the V24/V11 Card
All cables are for DTE connection. The cables used for the V24/V11 card are identified in the
table below. According to the nature of the interface in opposite, the user will choose the
suitable cable or adapter.
Std.
Plan No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
V24/V11 card Connection
1mm/1.6 mm Adapter for V35 Interface 6 486 885 1
V35 Interface adapter cable (34-way ISO
2593 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 598 1
4902 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 548 1
X24/V11 Interface adapter cable (34-way ISO
4093 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 599 1
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012548
3
4
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
22
109a
109b
Ba
Bb
4
3
142
107
104a
104b
103a
103b
106
140
105b
105a
141
108
115b
115a
114b
114a
102b
101
103b
103a
102
102b
102a
109b
115b
115a
Bb
Ba
114b
114a
104b
104a
105b
105a
106
108
109a
140
107
142
1
2
7
37
3
4
5
6
19
20
8
9
10
12
13
14
18
21
22
24
25
26
30
31
11
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Figure 3.25 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-37
6012598
2500
4
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
Cable
DB Connector (26-way male)
DB Connector (34-way female)
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Figure 3.26 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-38
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012599
3
4
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
22
109a
109b
Ba
Bb
105b
105a
115b
103b
103a
104b
102
101
115a
3
104a
1
2
15
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
12
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Figure 3.27 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-39
Cables for the ETH card
The cables used for the ETH card are identified in the table below. According to the nature of
the interface in opposite, the user will choose the suitable cable or adapter.
Std.
Plan No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) _ 55670199 1
ETH Card A2S card Connection Cable
for 1x2 Mbit/s ports
0.4 m 251748651 1
0.4 m 251748643 1
5
5
6
7
0
1
9
9
1
10
19
2
21
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
TX+ ( )
RX+ ( )
TX- ( )
RX- ( )
"Bottom" connectors
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
Wiring diagram
HE 5 connector
(26-way male)
RJ45 connector
(8-way female)
Figure 3.28 - RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port)
NOTE : Use a shielded lead to connect LAN to this adapter.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-40
25
6 3 2 1
40 0
=
ETH A2S
=
1 2 3 6
25
7 7 7 8
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P2-F1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
WIRING SIDE VIEW
SLOT A2S SLOT ETH
END A
END B
hardback plait
to the hood
of the connector
hardback plait
to the hood
of the connector
Figure 3.29 - ETH Card A2S card Connection Cable for 1x2 Mbit/s ports
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-41
ETH
1 2 6 7 8
7
3
300
25
20 30
7
4
1 2 3 6
7
1 2 3 6
1 2 3 6
26 PTS M
RX3_2
RX3_1
TX3_2
TX3_1
RX2_2
RX2_1
TX2_2
TX2_1
RX2_2
RX2_1
TX2_2
TX2_1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
26 PTS M
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q3-P2-F2
Q3-P2-F1
26 PTS M
Q2-P1-F2
Q2-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
Q4-P1-F1
Q3-P2-F2
Q3-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q3-P1-F2
Q3-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q2-P1-F2
Q2-P1-F1
Q2-P2-F2
Q2-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
Q4-P2-F1
Q4-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
RX3_2
RX3_1
RX4_1
RX4_2
TX4_2
TX4_1
TX3_1
TX3_2
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q3-P1-F2
Q3-P1-F1
26 PTS M
Q2-P2-F2
Q2-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
Q4-P2-F1
RX4_22
RX4_11
TX4_22
TX4_11
Braid connected
SLOT A2S
SLOT ETH
MIDDLE
HIGH
WIRING SIDE VIEW
END B
END A
See detail 2
See detail 1
END B END A
Cable identificat ion
MIDDLE
H
I
G
H
L
O
W
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
HI GH END - 1 Quad
in a t ubular braid
LOW END - 2 Quads
in a t ubular braid
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-42
Cables for the 6PAFC Card
The cables used for the 6PAFC card are identified in the table below. According to engineering
to be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050107 Connection cable for the 6PAFC Card 2.5 m 55670096
12 m 55670098
24.8 m 55670099
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050107
A
B
C
C
P4
P1
P1
P4
P1
B
A
1
P10
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
P1
P1
13
3
2
1
10
P7
P4
P1
P4
L
C
P5
P2
P2
P5
P2
B
A
P11
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
13
3
2
1
10
P8
P5
C
P6
P3
P3
P6
P3
B
A
P12
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
13
3
2
1
10
P9
P6
BK
RD
GN
WH
BU
OG
BN
BU
WH
WH
BN
BU
WH
BN
WH
WH
OG
WH
OG
RD
WH
BK
RD
RD
BU
BN
WH
OG
GN
BU
RD
BU
GN
WH
GN
RD
WH
BK
RD
BK
OG
BU
WH
GN
BN
OG
RD
OG
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No. T
O
P
MIDDLE
B
O
T
T
O
M
Legend:
A L2w Rx 4w AF
B Tx 4w AF
C Ron/Tron a-b
Figure 3.31 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-43
Cables for the Subscr and Exchan Cards
The cables used for the cards above are identified in the table below. . According to engineering
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050110 Cables for the Subscr and Exchan Cards 2.5 m 55670108
12 m 55670110
24.8 m 55670111
1
2
3
4
4
55050110
A1 A2
A3
26
19
9
3
2
1
10
26
19
9
3
2
1
10
A1
A2
A3
26
19
9
13
3
2
1
10
L
2 1
3
55050110
P4
P2
P5
P1
P6
P3
WH
OG
RD
BU
BU
RD
OG
WH
GN
BN
WH WH
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
B
O
T
T
O
M
MIDDLE
T
O
P
Figure 3.32 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-44
Connection Panel
Connector: J108
Signal Name
10--------------------------- TSIG1A
1------------------------------------------ TSIG1B
19---------------- TSIG2A
11---------------------------
2------------------------------------------
20---------------- TSIG2B
12---------------------------
3------------------------------------------
21---------------- TSIG3A
13---------------------------
4------------------------------------------
22---------------- TSIG3B
14--------------------------- 0V/MGND
5------------------------------------------ GTR
23----------------
15---------------------------
6------------------------------------------ Common Point (CP)
24---------------- REMCON2_C
16--------------------------- 0V/MGND
7------------------------------------------ REMCON1_C
25---------------- REMCON2_B
17---------------------------
8------------------------------------------ REMCON1_B
26---------------- REMCON2_A
18---------------------------
9------------------------------------------ REMCON1_A
Table 3.8 - J108 Connector, Alarm Loops
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-45
3.1.3.3 J108 Alarm Loop Connector
The J108 connector (HE501, 26-way) provides the operator with two types of alarm information:
- alarm information (major or minor) at the GTR interface using a relay contact or service
grounding (type of circuit used is determined by the EJ600 link option on the GIE-S card),
- 3-way relay contact interface (2 in number).
Furthermore, connector J108 has three relay contact status input interfaces used in acquiring
the status of external FMX parameters (remote control signals).
Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3.8.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-46
Cable for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling:
The cables used for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling are identified in
the following table. According to engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable
cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050108 Cable for the GTR interface, remote 2.5 m 55670100
commands and remote signaling 5 m 55670101
(Quantity : 1/shelf) 12 m 55670102
24.8 m 55670103
1
2
3
1
2
4
L
3
55050108 55050108
4
1
10
19
26
18
9
P6
P7
P3
P2
P4
P1
P5
A
B
C
B
A
A
B
A
B
C
B
A
RD
OG
RD
GN
WH
BU
BN
WH
BU
RD
Cable reference
(length depending)
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable Part No.
Wiring diagram
TSIG 1
TSIG 2
TSIG 3
REMCON2
REMCON1
GTR
CP
REMCON2
REMCON1
Figure 3.33 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan)
GTR Interface Alarm Information
This information is available on pins 5 and 6 of the connector; its nature depends on the
position of the EJ600 link on the GIE-S card according to the table below.
TNM Alarm EJ600 Link Position Status
Normal 1Y - 2Y or 2Y - 3Y No alarm
Fault 2Y -3Y Relay contact
Fault 1Y - 2Y Sce GND
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-47
Relay Contact Interface
Connector J108 supplies two alarm indication relay contacts which may be used in the following
two ways:
- via automatic activation according to criterion defined by an OR type logic function of all or
part of the following information:
. combination of alarm indication (major alarm or minor alarm),
. one or more remote monitoring signals,
- or via a operation control order.
NOTE: Mode of operation is set by the operator using the CT for each interface.
The different modes of operation of the remote control interfaces no. 1 (REMCON1_A_B_C)
and no. 2 (REMCON2_A_B_C) are provided in the table below.
Alarm REMCON1_B - REMCON1_C loop or
REMCON2_B - REMCONC1_C loop
REMCON1_B - REMCON1_A loop or
REMCON2_B - REMCON1_A loop
Absent Open Closed
Present Closed Open
Relay Contact Input Interfaces (Remote Monitoring signals)
Connector J108 provides connection of 3 incoming loops (TSIG1, TSIG2 and TSIG3) significant
of the outside environment.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-48
Connector J1 on GIE-S
front panel
Signal Name
(ITU-T abbreviation)
Designation Circuit V24
1 RTS
Request to Send ()
105 -DCE
2 DTR
Data Terminal Ready ()
108/2 - DCE
3 TD
Transmit Data ()
103 - DCE
4
5 Sig GND
Signaling Ground ()
102 - DCE
6 RD
Receive Data ()
104 - DCE
7 DSR
Data Set Ready ()
107 - DCE
8 CTS
Clear To Send ()
106 - DCE
Table 3.9 - GIE-S Card - J1 Connector
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-49
3.1.3.4 Auxiliary Interface
Two V.24 ports are available depending on the equipment connected:
- GIE-S card front panel connector J1 for a local CT,
- connection panel connector J122 for a modem for remote CT.
The GIE-S front panel key is used to select the active function for the data inputs; data
outputs are available simultaneously on both interfaces.
GIE-S Card Front Panel Connector
Connector J1 (RJ45, 8-way) located on the front panel is designed for CT connection; the
interface complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave
like a DCE with respect to the terminal. Interface pin assignment is provided in Table 3.9.
Transmission characteristics
- ASCII code: 1 start bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity,
- Bit rate 9600 bps,
- Transmission mode: asynchronous,
- Local CT Connection Cable: see Figure 3.34.
7
6
3 2
5
3
4
2
8
1
RTS
CTS
DTR
6
7
8
DSR
RXD
TXD
5
1
9
NC
NC
4
2
9
5
3
8
4
7
1
6
251028174 251028174
1
8
1
2
3
3
2
1
1800 20 mm
RJ45 Connector (8-way male)
Cable
Wiring diagram
8-way male
9-way female
Figure 3.34 - Local CT Connection Cable
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-50
Connection panel
Connector: J122
Signal Name
(ITU-T
abbreviation)
10------------------- DSC Data Set Connect () 108/1 - DTE
1------------------------------- 0V/MGND
19-------- RES19 (reserved)
11------------------- 0V/MGND
2------------------------------- TD Transmit Data () 103 - DTE
20-------- RXP2A
12-------------------
3------------------------------- RD Receive Data () 104 - DTE
21-------- RXP2B
13-------------------
4------------------------------- RTS Request To Send () 105 - DTE
22-------- RXCLKP2A
14-------------------
5------------------------------- CTS Clear To Send () 106 - DTE
23-------- RXCLKP2B
15-------------------
6------------------------------- DSR Data Set Ready () 107 - DTE
24-------- TXCLKP2A
16-------------------
7------------------------------- 0V/MGND
25-------- TXCLKP2B
17------------------- 0V/MGND
8------------------------------- CD Data Carrier detect on data channel () 109 - DTE
26-------- TXP2A
18------------------- RES18 (reserved)
9------------------------------- TXP2B
Table 3.10 - Connector J122, "CT/P2" Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-51
Modem Port
Connector J122 (HE5 high bit rate, 26-way) is designed for modem or MEGAPAC equipment
connection; the function complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the
FMX to behave like a DTE (terminal) with respect to a DCE (modem).
The P2 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 synchronous type) includes four clock/data pairs in transmit
and receive.
The "CT/P2" interface is used.
Characteristics are provided in Table 3.10.
CT Interface Transmission Characteristics:
- CT Connection Cable via MODEM: see Figure 3.35.
55670009
1 2
3
L = 6 m
1
2
4
3
19
10
26
104
103
105
106
107
102
108
109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
10
14
23
4
1
2
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
Connection diagram
(J122)
Cable
Cable number
MODEM side
Figure 3.35 - CT Connection Cable via Modem
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-52
3.1.3.5 P2 Management Interface
Cables for P2 Management Interface connection
The cables used for P2 Management Interface above are identified in the table below.
According to the nature of the interface of P2 management and the type of engineering to be
respected, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55670465 Cables for P2 Management Interface 2.5 m 55670465-2M5
connection 5 m 55670465-5M0
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670465-12M
24.8 m 55670465-25M
55670492 P2 Management Interface cable with 1.5 m 55670492-1M5
standard end (9-way female)
(Quantity : 1/port)
3
L
1
10
19
20
26
18
9
1
2
3
55670465- 55670465-
2 1
TXP2B
TXCLKP2B
TXCLKP2A
TXP2A
RXCLKP2B
RXCLKP2A
RXP2B
RXP2A
Q2-P1
Q1-P1
Q2-P2
BU
VT
GY
YE
VT
BN
GY
WH
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Wiring diagram
Cable
To another equipment
P1 nterface
Free ends
Figure 3.36 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-53
1
3
4
2
55670492-
L
1
10
19
2
21
15
23
24
26
18
9
8
7
5
1
3
4
2
P1
J122
P2
4
3
16
20
22
25
Q1P2
P2
P1
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
7
8
Q1P2
Q1P1
Q1P1
Q2P2
Q2P2
Q2P1
Q2P1
RXP2A
RXP2B
RXCLKP2A
RXCLKP2B
TXCLKP2A
TXCLKP2B
TXP2A
TXP2B
Cable
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Figure 3.37 - P2 Management Interface Cable with standard end
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-54
Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to P1 Management Interface with slot 15.
The P1 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 type) includes 4 clock/data pairs in transmit and receive.
Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3.11.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670466-12M
24.8 m 55670466-25M
standard end (9-way male)
(Quantity : 1/port)
3
L
1
10
19
2
20
14
26
18
9
RXP1B
1
2
3
55670466- 55670466-
2 1
RXP1A
13
RXCLKP1A
RXCLKP1B
TXCLKP1B
TXCLKP1A
TXP1B
TXP1A
17
Q1-P1 Q2-P2
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
VT
BN
GY
YE
GY
WH
VT
BU
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Wiring diagram
Cable
P2 interface
Free ends
Connection panel
side (J129)
To P2 of
another
equipment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-55
1
3
4
2
55670491-
L
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
7
5
1
3
4
2
P2
J129
4
3
16
20
25
Q1P2 TxP1A
Q1P1 TxCLKP1B
P1 P2
14
17
P1
1
2
6
3
4
5
7
8
9
Q1P2 TxP1B
Q1P1 TxCLKP1A
Q2P2 RxCLKP1B
Q2P2 RxCLKP1A
Q2P1 RxP1A
Q2P1 RxP1B
Cable
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
To P2 of
another
equipment
Figure 3.39 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-56
3.1.3.7 TNM Port Interface
Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to TNM in IP Ethernet with slot 15.
Connection Panel
Connector: J129
Signal Name
10------------------------
1---------------------------------------
19-----------
11------------------------
2---------------------------------------
20-----------
12------------------------
3---------------------------------------
21-----------
13------------------------
4---------------------------------------
22-----------
14------------------------
5---------------------------------------
23-----------
15------------------------
6---------------------------------------
24-----------
16------------------------
7---------------------------------------
25-----------
17------------------------
8---------------------------------------
26-----------
18------------------------
9---------------------------------------
RXP1B
RXCLKP1A
0V/MGND (Ground)
RXP1A
RXCLKP1B
ETH_TXN
TXCLKP1B
ETH_TXP
TXCLKP1A
ETH_RXP
ETH_RXN
ETH_TERM1
TXP1B
ETH_TERM2
TXP1A
Table 3.11 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-57
Figure 3.40 - 26-way RJ45 Adapter (TNM Ethernet Access)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-58
Connection Panel
Connector: J115
Signal Name Designation
10------------------------ Synchro Out - Synchronization Output
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
19----------- Synchro Out + Synchronization Output
11------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
2---------------------------------------
20----------- Synchro In - Synchronization Input
12------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
3---------------------------------------
21----------- Synchro In + Synchronization Input
13------------------------
4---------------------------------------
22-----------
14------------------------
5--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
23-----------
15------------------------
6---------------------------------------
24-----------
16------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
7---------------------------------------
25-----------
17------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
8---------------------------------------
26-----------
18------------------------
9---------------------------------------
Table 3.12 - Connector J115, Synchronization, SEM, Line Test Bus Ports
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-59
3.1.3.8 J115 Multiport Connector
The J115 (HE5 high bit rate 26-way) connector groups the external synchronization, SEM and
Line Test Bus ports; its pin assignment is provided in Table 3.12.
External Synchronization Port
External synchronization connection complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703. Its
characteristics are the following:
- Fe = 2048 kHz 50.10
-6
,
- adaptation attenuation at 2048 kHz 15 dB,
- Connection cable: see : Figure 3.41, Figure 3.42and Figure 3.43.
The cables used for synchronization connection are identified in the following table. According
to the type of engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable (Quantity :
1/port).
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length (L) Code No.
55050121 shelf synchronization connection cable 2.5 m 55670127
5 m 55670128
12 m 55670129
24.8 m 55670130
55050125 Two-shelf synchronization connection cable 1.5 m 55670145
3 m 55670146
55050126 Three-shelf synchronization connection 1.5 m 55670147
cable 3 m 55670148
NOTE: The FMX continuously generates on pins 10 and 19 of the connector, a
frequency controlled by the active synchronization source.
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
1
10
19
18
26
9
1
2
3
2
4
3
L
55050121
4
55050121
BU
VT
BN
VT
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
J115 connection
panel side
Cable
Cable Part No.
Free ends
Dispatcher side
Figure 3.41 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-60

9
26
18
1
20
21
19
11
10
1
12
10
21
20
19
26
18
9
1
2
3
5 5 0 5 0 1 2 5
A B
4
4
3
4
L
1 2
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P1
Cable
Wiring diagram
Connection
panel side
Connection
panel side
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.42 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-61

J115
J115
B2
B1
9
26
18
1
20
21
19
10
B2
B1
10
19
1
12
10
21
20
19
J115
26
18
9
26
18
9
1
2
3
1
2
5 5 0 5 0 1 2 6
A
B
C
L
D
4
4
3
4
Connection
panel side
Connection
panel side
Cable
HE5 connectors (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.43 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
3 - FMX9-S SHELF INSTALLATION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-62
C
O
B

(
S
E
C
U
R
I
S
A
T
I
O
N
)
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
G
I
E
C
O
B
9
u
n
a
s
s
ig
n
e
d
s
lo
t
s
Cover
2
S
H
D
S
L

s
lo
ts

+
Figure 3.44 - Front panel of the FMX9-S shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-63
3.2 Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX9-S Shelf)
The FMX9-S shelf may be installed in CEPT Type 80, M3 or 19or ETSI rack-mounting shelves
in the same way as FMX12 shelf.
NOTE: The specific rack environment adapter kits, power supply filter and cables are
supplied on request.
1
2
3
assembly kit
. CLS M3x4 screws
2
6
6
Table 3.13 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
bracket to the vertical.
- Position the reversible adapter brackets (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure
(item 3).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-64
5
4
6U
3U

2
0
0

(
E
T
S
I

R
a
c
k
)
1
9
0
.
5

(
1
9
"

R
a
c
k
)
2 cage
nuts (M6)
SHELF
Connection
panel
L-H side
vertical member
Hexagonal head
Figure 3.45 - FMX9-S shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-65
Shelf Mounting in 19" or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf (Figure 3.45)
The mounting of the shelf in the 19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf is provided for indicative
purposes; the parts used to mount the shelf in the rack-mounting shelves (brackets, cage nuts
etc.) specific to them are not supplied.
Assembly principle:
- position the support brackets inside the rear of the rack-mounting shelf (lower level of shelf)
and secure,
- position the empty shelf at the rear of the rack-mounting shelf and place on the support
brackets,
- slide it in until the shelf reversible adapter brackets come in contact with the shelf risers,
secure using the cage nuts and M6 x 12 hex-head screws (item 4).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-66
-48V
-48V1
-48V2
-48S
-48VS
Secondary
voltages
Protecti on OB1
Protecti on OB2
Protecti on
OBS
Primary
voltages
Servi ce GND
POWER
EQUIPMENT
Fail
Power converter
ALARMS
VIS MAJ ALM
0V
Chassi s
ground
Terti ary
voltages
VIS MIN ALM
AUD MAJ ALM
AUD MIN ALM
Major alarm
Minor alarm
EQUIPMENT
The relays are closed when
the alarm is present.
Visual
Audible
Visual
Audible
Power supply filter
J1 connector
Servi ce GND
Servi ce GND
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-67
Setting up the Power Supply Filter
The shelf is supplied without a power supply filter; it is compulsory however to guarantee
that EMC standards are met.
Setting up the Filter:
- remove the filter support cover,
- plug in the power supply filter card on the connection panel,
- connect the power cable to connector J1 (HE501, 25-way male) on the power supply filter,
connector pin options are shown in Table 3.14 below.
Power Supply Filter J1 Connector Pin Options Signal Name
1-------------------------------------------- -48V2
14---------------------- -48V2
2--------------------------------------------- -48V2
15---------------------- -48V2
3--------------------------------------------- -48V1
16---------------------- -48V1
4--------------------------------------------- -48V1
17---------------------- -48V1
5--------------------------------------------- ALA MN*
18---------------------- Service GND
6--------------------------------------------- Service GND
19---------------------- MN* ALM
7--------------------------------------------- MJ* ALM
20---------------------- -48S
8--------------------------------------------- -48S
21---------------------- MJ* ALM
9--------------------------------------------- GND2 (GND1)*
22---------------------- OB1 (OB2)*
10------------------------------------------- GND2 (GND1)*
23---------------------- OB1 (OB2)*
11------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
24---------------------- 0V/MGND
12------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
25---------------------- 0V/MGND
13------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
* power supply filters (5 = MN ALM, 7 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND2, 19 = 21 = Not connected
and 22 = 23 = GND1).
Sound and visual alarm power supply filters (5 = 19 = MN ALM, 7 = 21 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 =
GND1, 22 = 23 = OB2). Seen from PABB, 5 = ALA MN sound, 19 = MN ALM visual, 7 = MJ
ALM sound et 21 = MJ Alm visual.
Table 3.14 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter
(MaJor or MiNor)
ALARM
LEDs
ALARM STATUS
(Major or Minor)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-68
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
P101A
P102B
Connector
with 6.35
faston contacts
Power filter
Power and Alarm
bus Bar
(PABB)
Front-end connection access shelf
Figure 3.47 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting
Shelves
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-69
L = 70 cm
3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
P101A
P102B
A
B
5
4
1
2
3
4
J1 2 1
A
B
6013235
5
Shelf side
BDA side
Chassis ground
Major Alarm Extn
Cable
Cable no.
Connector (25-way female )
Connectors wi th - 6.35 faston contacts
Power supply
filter
Chassis ground
Minor Alarm Extn
Service ground
Figure 3.48 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors
L = 70 cm
3
2
6012721
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
4
1
2
3
4
J1
Ali/PWR
BDA side
Cable
Cable no.
Shelf side
Power supply
filter
Chassis ground
Signal ground
Service ground
Figure 3.49 - Power Cable equipped with one 7-way Connector
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-70
J101
J102 J103 J104 J105 J106 J107 J108 J109
J120 J121
J110 J111 J112 J113 J114
J122
J
1
2
3
J115 J116 J117
LED/DEL
Ala/Alm
-48VS
OBS
Ala DsJ
Ala MJ1
Ala MJ2
Ala Mn1
Ala Mn2
Mm/Gnd
TB2 TB1
Mm/Gnd
J118
1234
J119
12345678
1234
1234567812345678
3 2 1
OBS
Z
Y
J1
J2
J102
J1
J104 J105
J111 J112
J118 J119
J124 J125 J126
J131 J132 J133
J138 J139 J140 J141 J142 J143
J134 J135 J136
J127 J128 J129
J120 J121 J122
J113 J114 J115
J106 J107 J108
J102
J109
J123
J130
J137
J116
J104 J105
J111 J112
J118 J119
J124 J125 J126
J131 J132 J133
J138 J139 J140 J141 J142 J143
J134 J135 J136
J127 J128 J129
J120
J121 J122
J113 J114 J115
J106 J107 J108
J109
J123
J130
J137
J116
Power Supply Cable
CONNECTION PANEL
S
l
o
t

1
S
l
o
t

3
S
l
o
t

4
S
l
o
t

6
S
l
o
t

7
S
l
o
t

8
S
l
o
t

9
S
l
o
t

1
0
S
l
o
t

1
1
S
l
o
t

1
2
S
l
o
t

1
3
S
l
o
t

1
4
S
l
o
t

1
5
S
l
o
t

1
6
S
l
o
t

1
7
S
l
o
t

2
POWER
SUPPLY
FILTER
Figure 3.50 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-71
M3 or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf Power Distribution
The power distribution principle for the M3 or ETSI is provided in User Manual PAPA G2
(PAPE G2) GU - N5671477XXYY (XX = Version and YY = Edition) and Figure 3.50.
The Remote Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PPAP G2) or (RPAP G2) is located in the
upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes a distribution card which allows:
- the protection of secondary voltages (PPAP only) from the power unit of the station and the
distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 25 A circuit-breakers to the equipment (the
calibration of -48 V is 2 A),
The shelf is connected to the PPAP G2 or RPAP G2 by a power cable equipped with a female
1
2
3 3
2 1
Ali/PWR
J1
6012261
3
Cable
PAPA G2 side
Power
supply filter
Shelf side
Cable no.
L = 1.3 or 2.5m
according to use.
1
2
3 3
2 1
Ali/PWR
J1
L = 3m
6012711 Free ends
Cable
Cable no.
Shelf side
Power supply
filter
Power supply side
Figure 3.52 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf)
Blue- White
Yellow- White
OBS : Black-White
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-72
J
1
0
1
J
1
0
4
J
1
0
5
J
1
1
1
J
1
1
2
J
1
1
8
J
1
1
9
J
1
2
4
J
1
2
5
J
1
2
6
J
1
3
1
J
1
3
2
J
1
3
3
J
1
3
8
J
1
3
9
J
1
4
0
J
1
4
1
J
1
4
2
J
1
4
3
J
1
3
4
J
1
3
5
J
1
3
6
J
1
2
7
J
1
2
8
J
1
2
9
J
1
2
0
J
1
2
1
J
1
2
2
J
1
1
3
J
1
1
4
J
1
1
5
J
1
0
6
J
1
0
7
J
1
0
8
J
1
0
2
J
1
0
9
J
1
2
3
J
1
3
0
J
1
3
7
J
1
1
6
J
1
4
J
8
J
5
J
2
6
J
2
3
J
2
0
J
1
7
J
2
9
J
4
1
J
3
8
J
3
5
J
3
2
J
4
7
J
4
4
J
1
J
3
J
1
5
J
9
J
6
J
2
7
J
2
4
J
2
1
J
1
8
J
3
0
J
4
2
J
3
9
J
3
6
J
3
3
J
4
8
J
4
5
J
2
J
4
J
1
6
J
1
0
J
7
J
2
8
J
2
5
J
2
2
J
1
9
J
3
1
J
4
3
J
4
0
J
3
7
J
3
4
J
4
9
J
4
6
1
1

P
o
r
t

C
a
r
d
s

s
l
o
t
s
P
O
W
E
R

S
U
P
P
L
Y
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
l
o
t

1
5
S
l
o
t

1
7
S
l
o
t

3
S
l
o
t

7
S
l
o
t

9
S
l
o
t

1
1
S
l
o
t

1
3
S
l
o
t

4
S
l
o
t

6
S
l
o
t

8
S
l
o
t

1
0
S
l
o
t

1
2
S
l
o
t

1
4
S
l
o
t

1
6
S l o t 1
S l o t 2
S l o t 3
S l o t 4
S l o t 6
S l o t 7
S l o t 8
S l o t 9
S l o t 1 0
S l o t 1 1
S l o t 1 2
S l o t 1 3
S l o t 1 4
S l o t 1 5
S l o t 1 6
S l o t 1 7
Figure 3.53 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX9-S Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-73
External equipment connections are performed on the front panel of the shelf on the upper
panel.
The different equipment cards are plugged into the lower part of the shelf in slots 1 to 17.
Locations are preset for power converters (slots 1 et 2) and common equipment units
(GIE-S card in slot 15, first COB card in slot 16, second COB card (standby) in slot 17). Slots 3
and 4 are reserved for the SHDSL cards. Slot 5 does not exit. Slots 6 to 14 are standardized
and can receive any access card according to the desired configuration by the user.
This paragraph specifies the connectors associated with each slot (in particular the general
purpose slots) and, for each type of port, the nature of the signals, connector pin assignments
and cables proposed.
3.2.3.1 Slot/Connector Association
The table below defines the allocation of each connector on the connection panel and specifies
the distribution of line access connectors according to the slots (refer to Figure 3.53).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-74
Slot numbers Card Name Connection Panel Connectors
(external ports)
01
02
Power Converters:
+5V, -5V, +53V, -53V
J101 Power Supply Filter
03
04
SDSL Cards (optional)
LTU2W, LTU4W
NTU2W,NTU4W
J102 SDSL line (slots 3, 4)
J109 2 Mbit/s SDSL Tx/Rx (slot 3)
J116 SDSL Operation (slot 3)
J123 SDSL Alarms (slots 3, 4)
J130 2 Mbit/s SDSL Tx/Rx (slot4)
J137 SDSL Operation (slot 4)
standardized slots
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Port Cards (optional):
A2S, 2w2B1Q, 4U
V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS
ADPCM, CONF, ETH
3 64 I, 6PAFC, Subscr
Exchan, Exchan12
Connector Grouping
J124 J131 J138
J104 J111 J118
J125 J132 J139
J105 J112 J119
J126 J133 J140
J106 J113 J120
J127 J134 J141
J107 J114 J121
J128 J135 J142
15 Operation Interface Card (GIE-S)
16* COnnections, Timing Circuit and
17 COB (standby)
J108 Loops - Alarms
J115 SYNCH.
J122 CT - P2
J129 TNM - P1
* When there is no protection, the COB card is plugged into slot 16.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-75
Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2)
Tx L (3-2)
|
on interface no. 3
Ex: Tx L (1-1)
Tx L (1-2)
Type of connectors: SUB D high density 26-way.
6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB or ETH cards,
- Table 3.17: : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with
V24/V11, V24/V28 or 4VAS cards,
- Table 3.18 : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with Subscr,
Exchan or Exch12 cards,
BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX cards.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-76
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
10---------------------------------- M A(3) Rx L Sig (3.1) Rx L (3.2)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(3) Rx L Sig(3.2) Rx L (3.1)
19--------------------- E B(6) Tx L (2.2)
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(3) Tx L Sig (3.1) Rx L (4.4)
20--------------------- E A(6) Rx L (2.2)
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(3) Tx L Sig (3.2) Rx L (4.2)
21--------------------- M B(6) RX+ () Rx L (2.2)
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(6) RX- () Rx L (2.1)
14---------------------------------- TX+ ()
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.2) Tx L (3.2) Tx L (4.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (6.2) Rx L (1.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.1) Tx L (3.1) Tx L (4.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (6.1) Rx L (1.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.2) Rx L (3.2) Tx L (3.1)
26--------------------- Rx L (6.2) Tx L (1.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (6.1) Tx L (1.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.1) Rx L (3.1) Tx L (3.2)
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
10---------------------------------- M A(2) Rx L Sig (2.1)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(2) Rx L Sig(2.2)
19--------------------- E B(5)
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(2) Tx L Sig (2.1)
20--------------------- E A(5)
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(2) Tx L Sig (2.2)
21--------------------- M B(5) RX+ ()
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(5) RX- ()
14---------------------------------- TX+ () Not Used
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.2) Tx L (2.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (5.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.1) Tx L (2.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (5.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.2) Rx L (2.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (5.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (5.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.1) Rx L (2.1)
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
10---------------------------------- M A(1) Rx L Sig (1.1)
1---------------------------------------------------- M B(1) Rx L Sig(1.2)
19--------------------- E B(4)
2---------------------------------------------------- E A(1) Tx L Sig (1.1)
20--------------------- E A(4)
3---------------------------------------------------- E B(1) Tx L Sig (1.2)
21--------------------- M B(4) RX+ () RX+ ()
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/ MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- M A(4) RX- () RX- ()
14---------------------------------- TX+ () TX+ ()
5----------------------------------------------------
23--------------------- TX- () TX- ()
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.2) Tx L (1.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (4.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (4.1)
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (4.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (4.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.1) Rx L (1.1)
Table 3.16 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I, IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-77
Connection Panel Top Connector
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J3) 106 (J4) 106 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J3) 108 (J3) 108 (J3)
19---------------------- 106a (J3)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101 J3) 101 (J3) 101 (J3)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J3) 107 (J3) 107 (J3)
20---------------------- 140 (J3) 140 (J4) 140 (J4)
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J3) 106 (J3) 106 (J3)
21---------------------- 105b (J3) 140 (J3) 140 (J3)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107 (J3)
22---------------------- 105a (J3)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J3) 102 (J3) 102 (J3)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J3) 142 (J3) 142 (J3)
23---------------------- 141 (J3) 141 (J3) 141 (J3)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J3) 102 (J4) 102 (J4)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J3) 109 (J3) 109 (J3)
24---------------------- 115b (J3) 115 (J4) 104 RB (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J3)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J3) 104 (J3) 104 RA (J3)
25---------------------- 115a (J3) 115 (J3) 104 RB (J3)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J3)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J3) 105 (J3) 105 (J3)
26---------------------- 114b (J3) 114 (J4) 103 TA (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J3) 114 (J3) 103 TA (J3)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J3) 103 (J3) 103 TB (J3)
Connection Panel Middle Connector
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J2) 109 (J4) 109 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J2) 108 (J2) 108 (J2)
19---------------------- 106 (J2) 142 (J4) 142 (J4)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101 J2) 101 (J2) 101 (J2)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J2) 107 (J2) 107 (J2)
20---------------------- 140 (J2)
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J2) 106 (J2) 106 (J2)
21---------------------- 105b (J2) 140 (J2) 140 (J2)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107 (J2)
22---------------------- 105a (J2)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J2) 102 (J2) 102 (J2)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J2) 142 (J2) 142 (J2)
23---------------------- 141 (J2) 141 (J2) 141 (J2)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J2)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J2) 109 (J2) 109 (J2)
24---------------------- 115b (J2) 107 (J4) 107 (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J2)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J2) 104 (J2) 104 RA (J2)
25---------------------- 115a (J2) 115 (J2) 104 RB (J2)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J2)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J2) 105 (J2) 105 (J2)
26---------------------- 114b (J2) 108 (J4) 108 (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J2) 114 (J2) 103 TA (J2)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J2) 103 (J2) 103 TB (J2)
Connection Panel Bottom Connector
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
10------------------------------------ Ba (J1) 105 (J4) 105 (J4)
1------------------------------------------------------- Bb (J1) 108 (J1) 108 (J1)
19---------------------- 106 (J1)
11------------------------------------ 0V/MGND (101J1) 101 (J1) 101 (J1)
2------------------------------------------------------- 109a (J1) 107 (J1) 107 (J1)
20---------------------- 140 (J1)
3------------------------------------------------------- 109b (J1) 106 (J1) 106 (J1)
21---------------------- 105b (J1) 140 (J1) 140 (J1)
4------------------------------------------------------- 107a (J1)
22---------------------- 105a (J1)
14------------------------------------ 102 (J1) 102 (J1) 102 (J1)
5------------------------------------------------------- 142 (J1) 142 (J1) 142 (J1)
23---------------------- 141 (J1) 141 (J1) 141 (J1)
15------------------------------------ 108 (J1) 141 (J4) 141 (J4)
6------------------------------------------------------- 104b (J1) 109 (J1) 109 (J1)
24---------------------- 115b (J1) 104 (J4) 104 RA (J4)
16------------------------------------ 102a (J1)
7------------------------------------------------------- 104a (J1) 104 (J1) 104 RA (J1)
25---------------------- 115a (J1 115 (J1) 104 RB (J1)
17------------------------------------ 102b (J1)
8------------------------------------------------------- 103b (J1 105 (J1) 105 (J1)
26---------------------- 114b (J1) 103 (J4) 103 TB (J4)
18------------------------------------ 114a (J1) 114 (J1) 103 TA (J1)
9------------------------------------------------------- 103a (J1) 103 (J1) 103 TB (J1)
Table 3.17 - V24/V11, V24/V28 and 4VAS Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-78
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA3 LA3
1---------------------------------------------------- LB3 LB3
19--------------------- LB10
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA4 LA4
20--------------------- LA10
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB4 LB4
21--------------------- LB9
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA9
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA2 LA2
1---------------------------------------------------- LB2 LB2
19--------------------- LB11
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA5 LA5
20--------------------- LA11
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB5 LB5
21--------------------- LB8
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA8
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
Subscr &
Exchan
Exch12
10---------------------------------- LA1 LA1
1---------------------------------------------------- LB1 LB1
19--------------------- LB12
11---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
2---------------------------------------------------- LA6 LA6
20--------------------- LA12
12---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------------------------------------- LB6 LB6
21--------------------- LB7
13---------------------------------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
4----------------------------------------------------
22--------------------- LA7
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6----------------------------------------------------
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7----------------------------------------------------
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8----------------------------------------------------
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9----------------------------------------------------
Table 3.18 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-79
J102 to J107/J123 to J128
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
11----------------------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
12----------------------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
13----------------------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.2)
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (3.1)
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.2)
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (3.1)
J109 to J114/J130 to J135
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
11----------------------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
12----------------------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
13----------------------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.2) U (4.2)*
24---------------------
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (2.1) U (4.1)*
25---------------------
17----------------------------------
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.2) U (3.2)*
26---------------------
18----------------------------------
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (2.1) U (3.1)*
J116 J121/J137 J142
4U TRANSFIX
10----------------------------------
1----------------------------------------------------
19---------------------
2----------------------------------------------------
20---------------------
3----------------------------------------------------
21---------------------
4----------------------------------------------------
22---------------------
14----------------------------------
5----------------------------------------------------
23---------------------
15----------------------------------
6---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.2)(Out L.2) Tx L (1.2) Tx L (1.2) U (2.2)
24--------------------- Tx L (4.2)
16----------------------------------
7---------------------------------------------------- Tx L (1.1)(Out L.1) Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1) U (2.1)
25--------------------- Tx L (4.1)
17---------------------------------- Screen (Rx) Screen (Rx) Screen (Rx) Screen
8---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.2)(In L.2) Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2) U (1.2)
26--------------------- Rx L (4.2)
18---------------------------------- Rx L (4.1)
9---------------------------------------------------- Rx L (1.1)(In L.1) Rx L (1.1) Rx L (1.1) U (1.1)
* : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
Table 3.19 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-80
Cables Used
Key to signal names: Px; Pair no., Qx; Quad no.,
Cables for BBTxRx and A2ME
The cables used for the BBTxRx and A2ME cards are identified in the following table. According
to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No
55050109 Link cable (Equipment / Connection area) 2,5 m 55670104
12 m 55670106
24.8m 55670107
1
2
3
2
A
B
4
4
3
55050109
1
L
B
A
WH
VT
GY
WH
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2
BU
VT
BU
GY
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Cable
HE5 connector (26-way male)
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Card Connector port
BBTxRx
Channel 1
Connection
panel
connector
Bottom
A2ME
Channel 1
Bottom
Figure 3.54 - Connection cable for BBTxRx and A2MEcards (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-81
The cables used for the four ports of the A2S card are identified in the following table.
According to the type of engineering to be respected, the user will choose among these three
options.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050105 1 cable for 4 120 ports 2,5 m 55670088
5 m 55670089
12 m 55670090
24.8 m 55670091
including:
55680317
ports including:
55680310
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-82
A3
A2 A3
1
2
3
4
2
55050105 A
B
A2
A1
B
A
B
A A
B
B
A
4
3 1
L
A1
GY
YE
YE
GY
VT
BU
BU
VT
VT
BN
VT
BN
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P2
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P2
Q2 - P2
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
GY
WH
GY
WH
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Legend :
A Tx L 2Mbit/s
B Rx L 2Mbit/s
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
TOP
Figure 3.55 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-83
500 mm
B1
B2
B
C
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
6
5
4
3
16
20
25
14
17
11
Rec L2/
Rec L3
Em L2/
Em L3
B1
B2
Em L2/Em L3
Rec L2/Rec L3
3
4
C
B
A
Item
Marking
In Rec L2
Out Em L2
Wiring diagram
Cable
Connection
panel side
(middle/top)
See table
Green wire
connecting
the coaxial cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
55670609
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L3
Out Em L3
middle top
55670609
2 Mbit/s port
Figure 3.56 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-84
500 mm
B1
B2
B3
B4
B
C
D
E
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
5
4
3
16
20
25
14
17
11
Em L4
Rec L4
Rec L1
Em L1
B1
B2
B3
B4
Em L1
Em L4
Rec L1
Rec L4
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
Item
Marking Low
55670xxx
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L1
In Rec L4
Out Em L4
Out Em L1
Wiring diagram
Cable
Connection
panel side
(bottom)
See table
Green wire
connecting
the coaxial cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
Figure 3.57 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-85
Cables for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q card
The cables used for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q cards are identified in the following table.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
Card Quantity
55050106 Connection cable for the 2.5 m 55670092 1 for 2w2B1Q
4U TRANSFIX et 2w2B1Q cards 5 m 55670093 2 for 4UTRANSFIX
12 m 55670094
24.8 m 55670095
1
2
3
1
2
4
55050106
1
10
19
26
18
9
L
4
Q1 -P1
Q1 -P2
3
WH
BU
VT
GY
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable Part No.
Cable reference
(length depending)
Middle connector: channel 3 et channel 4
Bottom connector: channel 1 et channel 2
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-86
Cables for the Exch12card
The cables used for the Exch12 card are identified in the following table. According to the type
of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050111 Connection cable for the Exch12 card 2.5 m 55670112
(Quantity : 1/ card) 5 m 55670113
12 m 55670114
24.8 m 55670115
A3
1
2
3
4
2
55050111
A2
A1
4
3 1
L
A1
55050111
P10
P9
P3
P4
A2
P11
P8
P2
P5
A3
P12
P7
P1
P6
BK
BK
BN
GN
BN
WH
WH
OG OG
RD
BU
WH
BK
BN
RD
GN
BK
RD
GN
BN BU
OG
RD
WH
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
TOP
Cable
Cable Part No.
Cable reference
(length depending)
Connection
panel side
Free ends
Wiring diagram
Figure 3.59 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-87
The cables used for the 3 64 I card are identified in the following table. According to the type of
Std Plan
No.
55050123 Connection cable for the 3 64 I card 2.5 m 55670135
12 m 55670137
24.8 m 55670138
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050123
A
B
C
C
Q1 - P2
B
A
1
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
L
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
C
Q2 - P2
B
A
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
Q2 - P1
Q1 - P2
Q1 - P2
C
Q3 - P2
B
A
26
19
9
7
18
8
6
3
2
1 10
Q3 - P1
Q2 - P1
Q2 - P1
GY
BK
VT
RD
GY
YE
GY
GY
YE
VT
BN
VT
BU
VT
GY
WH
VT
BU
WH
GY
WH
GY
YE
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Wiring diagram
T
O
P
MIDDLE
B
O
T
T
O
M
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-88
Cables for the V.24/V28 or 4VAS card
The cables used for the V24/V28 or 4VAS card (in V28 operating mode) are identified in the
following table. According to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std.
Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
N code
Card
Quantity
Connection of one DTE Cable for 1 channel 2.5 m 6 012 545 1 to 3
Connection of four DTE Cable for 4 channels 2.5 m 6 012 547 1
DCE/ DTE Adapter (used on cable
no.6012547)(1/channel)
0.30 m 6 012 546
Connection of one DCE Cable for 1 channel 2.5 m 55670144 1 to 3
Connection of four DCE Cable for 4 channels 2.5 m 55670143 1
1
2
3
2
6012546
30 cm
3
3
1
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
Connection
of one DCE
Cable
Cable number
Wiring diagram
DCE
mode
DTE
mode
To cable
no. 6 012 547
Figure 3.61 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 or 4VAS Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-89
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
102
142
109
104
105
103
106
140
141
115
22
101
114
115
141
107
108
140
106
142
102
103
105
104
109
108
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012545
3
4
1
2
15
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
21
Cable
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Connection
of one DTE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-90
Cable four DTEs
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012547
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J3)
102 (J3)
142 (J3)
109 (J3)
104 (J3)
105 (J3)
103 (J3)
22
108 (J3)
J4
J3
J2
J1
140 (J3)
106 (J3)
106 (J4)
101 (J3)
140 (J4)
102 (J4)
141 (J3)
115 (J3)
115 (J4)
114 (J4)
114 (J3)
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J2)
102 (J2)
142 (J2)
109 (J2)
104 (J2)
105 (J2)
103 (J2)
22
108 (J2)
140 (J2)
106 (J2)
109 (J4)
101 (J2)
141 (J2)
115 (J2)
107 (J4)
108 (J4)
114 (J2)
142 (J4)
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107 (J1)
102 (J1)
142 (J1)
109 (J1)
104 (J1)
105 (J1)
103 (J1)
13
108 (J1)
140 (J1)
106 (J1)
105 (J4)
101 (J1)
141 (J4)
141 (J1)
115 (J1)
104 (J4)
103 (J4)
114 (J1)
101 (J4)
114
115
141
108
140
142
J4 J3
114
115
141
108
140
142
3
4
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
142
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
J2
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
142
J1
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
114
115
141
108
140
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
15
17
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
HE5 Connectors (25-way female)
Wiring diagram
Middle
Top
Bottom
2.50 m
TOP
BOTTOM
MIDDLE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Connection
of one DTE
Figure 3.63 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-91
1
2
3
4
2
55670144
1
10
19
2
21
14
15
23
24
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
1
3
4
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103
Q3 - P1
101 Q4 - P1
141 Q3 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
101 Q4 - P1
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
140 Q1 - P1
102 Q1 - P2
105 Q3 - P1
108 Q2 - P1
109 Q2 - P2
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
24
21
20
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Connection
of one DCE
DTE
mode
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-92
Cable four DCEs
1
2
3
2
4
1
55670143
3
4
J4
1
10 19
2
20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
106
Q1 - P1
141 Q3 - P2
102
114
Q1 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
140
101 Q4 - P1
J3
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J3
1
10
19
2
20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
106
Q2 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
107
108
Q2 - P1
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
142
101 Q4 - P1
J2
J2
J4
J4
J2
1
10 19
2 20
14
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
107
108
Q2 - P1
140
106
Q1 - P1
109
142
Q2 - P2
105
104 Q3 - P2
103 Q3 - P1
105
Q4 - P1
104
Q3 - P2 141
103 Q3 - P1
114 Q1 - P2
102 Q1 - P2
101
101 Q4 - P1
J1
J1
J4
J4
141 Q3 - P2
J1
Q3 - P1
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J3
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J2
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
J1
Q4 - P1 101
Q3 - P2 104
Q3 - P1 103
Q2 - P2 109
Q1 - P1 140
Q2 - P1 108
Q1 - P2 102
Q3 - P1 105
106 Q1 - P1
107 Q2 - P1
142 Q2 - P2
114 Q1 - P2
141 Q3 - P2
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
1
2
18
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
24
21
20
15
17
Cable
Cable number
HE5 Connectors
(26-way male)
Connection
panel side
HE5 Connectors
(25-way male)
Wiring diagram
Middle
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Middle
J4
J3
J2
J1
2.50 m
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Connection
of one DCE
Figure 3.65 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-93
card can be used.
The cables used for the 4VAS card are identified in the following table. According to the type of
Std Plan No. Designation Length Code No.
Card
Quantity
251757845 1/2 connection cable for 2.5 m 251757973
12 m 251758016
251757832 1//2 connection cable for 2.5 m 251758024
4 interfaces 4VAS card - FMX12 5 m 251758037 1
12 m 251758045
108
101
107
106
141
142
109
104 RA
104 RB
105 (J2)
103 TA
103 TB
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
26 PTS M
P9
P10
1 2 3 4 7 8 7
4VAS
25
L
= =
4VAS
GY
GY
GN
VT
BK
VT
GN
VT
GY
WH
VT BU
VT
YE
GY
YE
See detail
END A
Braid connected
END B
WIRING SIDE VIEW
0V/MGND
140
0V/MGND
102
END A END B
Braid connected
Figure 3.66 - 1/2 cable for 1 interface connection of the 4VAS card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-94
101 (J3)
140 (J3)
107 (J3)
106 (J3)
141 (J3)
142 (J3)
108 (J3)
109 (J3)
104RA (J3)
104RB (J3)
103TA (J3)
103TB (J3)
105 (J3)
Q4-P1
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1
26 PTS M
Q4-P2
Q6-P1
Q5-P1
Q7-P2
Q8-P1
102 (J3)
106 (J4)
102 (J4)
140 (J4)
104RB (J4)
103TA (J4)
26 PTS M
26 PTS M
109 (J4)
107 (J4)
107 (J2)
141 (J2)
142 (J2)
108 (J2)
109 (J2)
104RA (J2)
104RB (J2)
103TA (J2)
103TB (J2)
Q3-P1
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Q4-P1
Q4-P2
140 (J1)
108 (J1)
101 (J1)
107 (J1)
106 (J1)
102 (J1)
142 (J1)
104RB (J1)
104RA (J1)
103TA (J1)
103TB (J1)
109 (J1)
105 (J1)
Q2-P1
Q4-P1
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1
105 (J4)
141 (J4)
104RA (J4)
103TB (J4) Q8-P2
Q7-P1
Q4-P2
Q5-P2
1 2 3 4
6
6
500
25
200
L
25 30 20
8
25
8 8 8
7
7
8
6
7
J1
J2
J3
J4
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4VAS
Q6-P2
Q3-P2
Q5-P2
Q2-P2
108 (J4)
142 (J4)
106 (J2)
140 (J2)
102 (J2)
101 (J2)
105 (J2)
VT
GY
VT
YE
VT
YE
GY
GY
GN
VT
GY
BK
BN
WH
VT
VT
GY
BU
VT
VT
VT
RD
GY
BK
BN
VT
GY
GN
GY
BK
YE
WH
VT
BU
GY
WH
GY
GY
GN
VT
RD
GY
BK
YE
BU
VT
VT
GY
WH
VT
GY
VT
GY
WH
OG
LOW
HIGH
END A
4VAS HIGH
Braid connected
WIRING SCHEDULE
END B
To J3
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
To J4
To J2
To J2
4VAS MIDDLE
4VAS LOW
END A END B
See detail 2
See detail 1
Figure 3.67 - 1/2 cable for 4 interfaces connection of the 4VAS card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-95
Cables for the V24/V11 Card
All cables are for DTE connection. The cables used for the V24/V11 card are identified in the
table below. According to the nature of the interface in opposite, the user will choose the
suitable cable or adapter.
Std.
Plan No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
V24/V11 card Connection
1mm/1.6 mm Adapter for V35 Interface 6 486 885 1
2593 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 598 1
4902 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 548 1
X24/V11 Interface adapter cable (34-way ISO
4093 connector)
2.5 m 6 012 599 1
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012548
3
4
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
22
109a
109b
Ba
Bb
4
3
142
107
104a
104b
103a
103b
106
140
105b
105a
141
108
115b
115a
114b
114a
102b
101
103b
103a
102
102b
102a
109b
115b
115a
Bb
Ba
114b
114a
104b
104a
105b
105a
106
108
109a
140
107
142
1
2
7
37
3
4
5
6
19
20
8
9
10
12
13
14
18
21
22
24
25
26
30
31
11
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Figure 3.68 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-96
6012598
2500
4
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
Cable
DB Connector (26-way male)
DB Connector (34-way female)
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Figure 3.69 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-97
1
2
3
2
4
1
6012599
3
4
1
10
19
2
20
21
14
15
23
24
25
26
18
9
8
7
6
5
22
109a
109b
Ba
Bb
105b
105a
115b
103b
103a
104b
102
101
115a
3
104a
1
2
15
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
12
Cable
Cable number
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
2.50 m
Figure 3.70 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-98
Cables for the ETH card
The cables used for the ETH card are identified in the table below. According to the nature of
the interface in opposite, the user will choose the suitable cable or adapter.
Std.
Plan No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) _ 55670199 1
0.4 m 251748651 1
0.4 m 251748643 1
5
5
6
7
0
1
9
9
1
10
19
2
21
15
23
26
18
9
8
7
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
TX+ ( )
RX+ ( )
TX- ( )
RX- ( )
"Bottom" connectors
J116 to J121/J137 to J142
Wiring diagram
HE 5 connector
(26-way male)
RJ45 connector
(8-way female)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-99
25
6 3 2 1
40 0
=
ETH A2S
=
1 2 3 6
25
7 7 7 8
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P2-F1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
WIRING SIDE VIEW
SLOT A2S SLOT ETH
END A
END B
hardback plait
to the hood
of the connector
hardback plait
to the hood
of the connector
Cable Identification
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-100
ETH
1 2 6 7 8
7
3
300
25
20 30
7
4
1 2 3 6
7
1 2 3 6
1 2 3 6
26 PTS M
RX3_2
RX3_1
TX3_2
TX3_1
RX2_2
RX2_1
TX2_2
TX2_1
RX2_2
RX2_1
TX2_2
TX2_1
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
26 PTS M
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q3-P2-F2
Q3-P2-F1
26 PTS M
Q2-P1-F2
Q2-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
Q4-P1-F1
Q3-P2-F2
Q3-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q3-P1-F2
Q3-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q2-P1-F2
Q2-P1-F1
Q2-P2-F2
Q2-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
Q4-P2-F1
Q4-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
RX3_2
RX3_1
RX4_1
RX4_2
TX4_2
TX4_1
TX3_1
TX3_2
RX1_2
RX1_1
TX1_2
TX1_1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q3-P1-F2
Q3-P1-F1
26 PTS M
Q2-P2-F2
Q2-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
Q4-P2-F1
RX4_22
RX4_11
TX4_22
TX4_11
Braid connected
SLOT A2S
SLOT ETH
MIDDLE
HIGH
WIRING SIDE VIEW
END B
END A
See detail 2
See detail 1
END B END A
Cable identificat ion
MIDDLE
H
I
G
H
L
O
W
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
HI GH END - 1 Quad
in a t ubular braid
LOW END - 2 Quads
in a t ubular braid
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-101
Cables for the 6PAFC Card
The cables used for the 6PAFC card are identified in the table below. According to engineering
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050107 Connection cable for the 6PAFC Card 2.5 m 55670096
12 m 55670098
24.8 m 55670099
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050107
A
B
C
C
P4
P1
P1
P4
P1
B
A
1
P10
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
P1
P1
13
3
2
1
10
P7
P4
P1
P4
L
C
P5
P2
P2
P5
P2
B
A
P11
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
13
3
2
1
10
P8
P5
C
P6
P3
P3
P6
P3
B
A
P12
25
26
24
22
21
20
19
9
7
18
8
6
13
3
2
1
10
P9
P6
BK
RD
GN
WH
BU
OG
BN
BU
WH
WH
BN
BU
WH
BN
WH
WH
OG
WH
OG
RD
WH
BK
RD
RD
BU
BN
WH
OG
GN
BU
RD
BU
GN
WH
GN
RD
WH
BK
RD
BK
OG
BU
WH
GN
BN
OG
RD
OG
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No. T
O
P
MIDDLE
B
O
T
T
O
M
Legend:
A L2w Rx 4w AF
B Tx 4w AF
C Ron/Tron a-b
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-102
Cables for the Subscr and Exchan Cards
The cables used for the cards above are identified in the table below. . According to engineering
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050110 Cables for the Subscr and Exchan Cards 2.5 m 55670108
12 m 55670110
24.8 m 55670111
1
2
3
4
4
55050110
A1 A2
A3
26
19
9
3
2
1
10
26
19
9
3
2
1
10
A1
A2
A3
26
19
9
13
3
2
1
10
L
2 1
3
55050110
P4
P2
P5
P1
P6
P3
WH
OG
RD
BU
BU
RD
OG
WH
GN
BN
WH WH
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
B
O
T
T
O
M
MIDDLE
T
O
P
Figure 3.75 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-103
Connection Panel
Connector: J108
Signal Name
10--------------------------- TSIG1A
1------------------------------------------ TSIG1B
19---------------- TSIG2A
11---------------------------
2------------------------------------------
20---------------- TSIG2B
12---------------------------
3------------------------------------------
21---------------- TSIG3A
13---------------------------
4------------------------------------------
22---------------- TSIG3B
14--------------------------- 0V/MGND
5------------------------------------------ GTR
23----------------
15---------------------------
6------------------------------------------ Common Point (CP)
24---------------- REMCON2_C
16--------------------------- 0V/MGND
7------------------------------------------ REMCON1_C
25---------------- REMCON2_B
17---------------------------
8------------------------------------------ REMCON1_B
26---------------- REMCON2_A
18---------------------------
9------------------------------------------ REMCON1_A
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-104
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-105
Cable for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling:
The cables used for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling are identified in
the following table. According to engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable
cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050108 Cable for the GTR interface, remote 2.5 m 55670100
commands and remote signaling 5 m 55670101
(Quantity : 1/shelf) 12 m 55670102
24.8 m 55670103
1
2
3
1
2
4
L
3
55050108 55050108
4
1
10
19
26
18
9
P6
P7
P3
P2
P4
P1
P5
A
B
C
B
A
A
B
A
B
C
B
A
RD
OG
RD
GN
WH
BU
BN
WH
BU
RD
Cable reference
(length depending)
Free ends
Connection
panel side
Cable
Cable Part No.
Wiring diagram
TSIG 1
TSIG 2
TSIG 3
REMCON2
REMCON1
GTR
CP
REMCON2
REMCON1
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-106
two ways:
Absent Open Closed
Present Closed Open
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-107
front panel
Signal Name
1 RTS
Request to Send ()
105 -DCE
2 DTR
Data Terminal Ready ()
108/2 - DCE
3 TD
Transmit Data ()
103 - DCE
4
5 Sig GND
Signaling Ground ()
102 - DCE
6 RD
Receive Data ()
104 - DCE
7 DSR
Data Set Ready ()
107 - DCE
8 CTS
Clear To Send ()
106 - DCE
Table 3.21 - GIE-S Card - J1 Connector
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-108
3.2.3.4 Auxiliary Interface
Two V.24 ports are available depending on the equipment connected:
- GIE-S card front panel connector J1 for a local CT,
- connection panel connector J122 for a modem for remote CT.
The GIE-S front panel key is used to select the active function for the data inputs; data
outputs are available simultaneously on both interfaces.
GIE-S Card Front Panel Connector
Connector J1 (RJ45, 8-way) located on the front panel is designed for CT connection; the
interface complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave
like a DCE with respect to the terminal. Interface pin assignment is provided in Table 3.21.
- Local CT Connection Cable: see Figure 3.77.
7
6
3 2
5
3
4
2
8
1
RTS
CTS
DTR
6
7
8
DSR
RXD
TXD
5
1
9
NC
NC
4
2
9
5
3
8
4
7
1
6
251028174 251028174
1
8
1
2
3
3
2
1
1800 20 mm
Cable
Wiring diagram
8-way male
9-way female
Figure 3.77 - Local CT Connection Cable
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-109
Connection panel
Connector: J122
Signal Name
(ITU-T
abbreviation)
10------------------- DSC Data Set Connect () 108/1 - DTE
1------------------------------- 0V/MGND
19-------- RES19 (reserved)
11------------------- 0V/MGND
2------------------------------- TD Transmit Data () 103 - DTE
20-------- RXP2A
12-------------------
3------------------------------- RD Receive Data () 104 - DTE
21-------- RXP2B
13-------------------
4------------------------------- RTS Request To Send () 105 - DTE
22-------- RXCLKP2A
14-------------------
5------------------------------- CTS Clear To Send () 106 - DTE
23-------- RXCLKP2B
15-------------------
6------------------------------- DSR Data Set Ready () 107 - DTE
24-------- TXCLKP2A
16-------------------
7------------------------------- 0V/MGND
25-------- TXCLKP2B
17------------------- 0V/MGND
8------------------------------- CD Data Carrier detect on data channel () 109 - DTE
26-------- TXP2A
18------------------- RES18 (reserved)
9------------------------------- TXP2B
Table 3.22 - Connector J122, "CT/P2" Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-110
Modem Port
Connector J122 (HE5 high bit rate, 26-way) is designed for modem or MEGAPAC equipment
connection; the function complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the
FMX to behave like a DTE (terminal) with respect to a DCE (modem).
The P2 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 synchronous type) includes four clock/data pairs in transmit
and receive.
The "CT/P2" interface is used.
CT Interface Transmission Characteristics:
- CT Connection Cable via MODEM: see Figure 3.78.
55670009
1 2
3
L = 6 m
1
2
4
3
19
10
26
104
103
105
106
107
102
108
109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
10
14
23
4
1
2
7
25
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
Connection diagram
(J122)
Cable
Cable number
MODEM side
Figure 3.78 - CT Connection Cable via Modem
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-111
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670465-12M
24.8 m 55670465-25M
standard end (9-way female)
(Quantity : 1/port)
3
L
1
10
19
20
26
18
9
1
2
3
55670465- 55670465-
2 1
TXP2B
TXCLKP2B
TXCLKP2A
TXP2A
RXCLKP2B
RXCLKP2A
RXP2B
RXP2A
Q2-P1
Q1-P1
Q2-P2
BU
VT
GY
YE
VT
BN
GY
WH
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Wiring diagram
Cable
P1 nterface
Free ends
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-112
1
3
4
2
55670492-
L
1
10
19
2
21
15
23
24
26
18
9
8
7
5
1
3
4
2
P1
J122
P2
4
3
16
20
22
25
Q1P2
P2
P1
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
7
8
Q1P2
Q1P1
Q1P1
Q2P2
Q2P2
Q2P1
Q2P1
RXP2A
RXP2B
RXCLKP2A
RXCLKP2B
TXCLKP2A
TXCLKP2B
TXP2A
TXP2B
Cable
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-113
Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to P1 Management Interface with slot 15.
The P1 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 type) includes 4 clock/data pairs in transmit and receive.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670466-12M
24.8 m 55670466-25M
(Quantity : 1/port)
3
L
1
10
19
2
20
14
26
18
9
RXP1B
1
2
3
55670466- 55670466-
2 1
RXP1A
13
RXCLKP1A
RXCLKP1B
TXCLKP1B
TXCLKP1A
TXP1B
TXP1A
17
Q1-P1 Q2-P2
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
VT
BN
GY
YE
GY
WH
VT
BU
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Wiring diagram
Cable
P2 interface
Free ends
Connection panel
side (J129)
To P2 of
another
equipment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-114
1
3
4
2
55670491-
L
1
10
19
2
13
24
26
18
9
8
7
5
1
3
4
2
P2
J129
4
3
16
20
25
Q1P2 TxP1A
Q1P1 TxCLKP1B
P1 P2
14
17
P1
1
2
6
3
4
5
7
8
9
Q1P2 TxP1B
Q1P1 TxCLKP1A
Q2P2 RxCLKP1B
Q2P2 RxCLKP1A
Q2P1 RxP1A
Q2P1 RxP1B
Cable
Connection
panel side
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
To P2 of
another
equipment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-115
3.2.3.7 TNM Port Interface
Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to TNM in IP Ethernet with slot 15.
Connection Panel
Connector: J129
Signal Name
10------------------------
1---------------------------------------
19-----------
11------------------------
2---------------------------------------
20-----------
12------------------------
3---------------------------------------
21-----------
13------------------------
4---------------------------------------
22-----------
14------------------------
5---------------------------------------
23-----------
15------------------------
6---------------------------------------
24-----------
16------------------------
7---------------------------------------
25-----------
17------------------------
8---------------------------------------
26-----------
18------------------------
9---------------------------------------
RXP1B
RXCLKP1A
0V/MGND (Ground)
RXP1A
RXCLKP1B
ETH_TXN
TXCLKP1B
ETH_TXP
TXCLKP1A
ETH_RXP
ETH_RXN
ETH_TERM1
TXP1B
ETH_TERM2
TXP1A
Table 3.23 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-116
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-117
Connection Panel
Connector: J115
Signal Name Designation
10------------------------ Synchro Out - Synchronization Output
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
19----------- Synchro Out + Synchronization Output
11------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
2---------------------------------------
20----------- Synchro In - Synchronization Input
12------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
3---------------------------------------
21----------- Synchro In + Synchronization Input
13------------------------
4---------------------------------------
22-----------
14------------------------
5--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
23-----------
15------------------------
6---------------------------------------
24-----------
16------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
7---------------------------------------
25-----------
17------------------------ 0V/MGND Ground
8---------------------------------------
26-----------
18------------------------
9---------------------------------------
Table 3.24 - Connector J115, Synchronization
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-118
- Fe = 2048 kHz 50.10
-6
,
- Connection cable: see : Figure 3.84, Figure 3.85 and Figure 3.86.
to the type of engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable (Quantity :
1/port).
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length (L) Code No.
55050121 shelf synchronization connection cable 2.5 m 55670127
5 m 55670128
12 m 55670129
24.8 m 55670130
3 m 55670146
55050126 Three-shelf synchronization connection 1.5 m 55670147
cable 3 m 55670148
NOTE: The FMX continuously generates on pins 10 and 19 of the connector, a
frequency controlled by the active synchronization source.
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
1
10
19
18
26
9
1
2
3
2
4
3
L
55050121
4
55050121
BU
VT
BN
VT
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
J115 connection
panel side
Cable
Cable Part No.
Free ends
Dispatcher side
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-119

9
26
18
1
20
21
19
11
10
1
12
10
21
20
19
26
18
9
1
2
3
5 5 0 5 0 1 2 5
A B
4
4
3
4
L
1 2
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P1
Cable
Wiring diagram
Connection
panel side
Connection
panel side
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.85 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-120

J115
J115
B2
B1
9
26
18
1
20
21
19
10
B2
B1
10
19
1
12
10
21
20
19
J115
26
18
9
26
18
9
1
2
3
1
2
5 5 0 5 0 1 2 6
A
B
C
L
D
4
4
3
4
Connection
panel side
Connection
panel side
Cable
HE5 connectors (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.86 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-121
3.2.3.9 Connectors associated to SHDSL cards slots
Type of connectors : SUB D 15-way.
The tables hereafter specify the use of the contacts of the connectors.
Connection Panel
Connector: J102
SHDSL
(Slots 3 and 4)
1------------------------------------------
9----------------
2------------------------------------------
10----------------
3------------------------------------------
11----------------
4------------------------------------------
12----------------
5------------------------------------------
13----------------
6------------------------------------------
14----------------
7------------------------------------------
15----------------
8------------------------------------------
SDSL_slot4_P1_wire2
SDSL_slot4_P2_wire2
SDSL_slot4_P1_wire1
SDSL_slot4_P2_wire1
SDSL_slot3_P1_wire2
SDSL_slot3_P2_wire2
SDSL_slot3_P1_wire1
SDSL_slot3_P2_wire1
Table 3.25 - SHDSL lines Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-122
Connection Panel
Connector: J109
SHDSL
(slot 3)
1------------------------------------------
9----------------
2------------------------------------------
10----------------
3------------------------------------------
11----------------
4------------------------------------------
12----------------
5------------------------------------------
13----------------
6------------------------------------------
14----------------
7------------------------------------------
15----------------
8------------------------------------------
Shield
2M_Rx2_3
2M_Tx1_3
2M_Tx2_3
2M_Rx1_3
Connection Panel
Connector: J130
SHDSL
(slot 4)
1------------------------------------------
9----------------
2------------------------------------------
10----------------
3------------------------------------------
11----------------
4------------------------------------------
12----------------
5------------------------------------------
13----------------
6------------------------------------------
14----------------
7------------------------------------------
15----------------
8------------------------------------------
Shield
2M_Rx2_4
2M_Tx1_4
2M_Tx2_4
2M_Tx1_4
Table 3.26 - 2 Mbit/s SHDSL Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-123
Connection Panel
Connector: J109
SHDSL
(slot 3 and 4)
1------------------------------------------
9----------------
2------------------------------------------
10----------------
3------------------------------------------
11----------------
4------------------------------------------
12----------------
5------------------------------------------
13----------------
6------------------------------------------
14----------------
7------------------------------------------
15----------------
8------------------------------------------
Shield
Min_Ala_1
Min_Ala_2
Maj_Ala_1
Maj_Ala_2
Table3.27 - SDSL alarms connection
Connection Panel
Connector: J116 and 137
Signal name
(abrviation
UIT-T)
Designation V.24 Circuit
1------------------------------------------
9----------------
2------------------------------------------
10----------------
3------------------------------------------
11----------------
4------------------------------------------
12----------------
5------------------------------------------
13----------------
6------------------------------------------
14----------------
7------------------------------------------
15----------------
8------------------------------------------
RD
TD
0V/MGND
Rx Data ()
Tx Data ()
102
104 - DTE
103 - DTE
The front panel operating connectors for the SHDL cards are transferred to the subrack
connection panel, at J116 for slot 3 and J137 for slot 4.
Table3.28 - SHDSL Operation Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-124
3.2.3.10 Cables used by SHDSL cards
Cable connecting the SHDSL card to the A2S card
This cable is terminated :
At the A2S card end, with an Hdtype male 26-way connector.
The A2S card is connected to a 3 connectors block depending on the used slot.
For example: J128 J135 J142 for a card in slot 14.
Connect the cable for access 1 to the lower position connector, for access 2 to the middle
position connector and for access 3 to the upper position connector.
At the SHDSL card end, with a D type male 15-way.
Connect the card in slot 3 to connector J109 and the card in slot 4 to connector J130.
A2S end pin
(26-way)
A2S Fonction to SHDSL SHDSL end pin
(15-way)
J109 or J130
1 - 12 - 13
6
7
8
9
Shield
Tx1
Tx2
Rx1
Rx2
1
8
9
6
7
SHDSL alarms cable
FMX9-S shelf contains two locations for SHDSL cards. Each card provides a major and minor
alarm. These alarms are available on the J123 connector of the shelf, in "OR" wired between
the two cards. A specified cable allows to defer these alarms towards remote signalling inputs
of GIE-S card. Under these conditions, the state changes of these alarms are notified to the
Management System of (CT and IONOS Management).
the Major alarm is connected towards the Remote Signalling 1 input,
the Minor alarm is connected towards the Remote Signalling 2 input,
the remote signalling 3 input stays available.
Std Plan No. Designation
252677715 ALARMS SHDSL CABLE for FMX9-SP
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-125
Figure 3.87 - Cordon d'alarmes SHDSL pour FMX9-SP
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-126
J2
J1
6 M3x6 CBLZ
cruciform screw
6 M3 fixing holes
Motherboard
Converter
Figure 3.88 - -48V Battery Converter Mounting and Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-127
3.3 Rear-connection Shelf (FMX4 Shelf) Installation
The shelf may be installed in 19"and ETSI racks or on a table.
NOTE: The specific rack environment adapter kits and cables are supplied on request.
3.3.1 Power supply Installation
Power converter installation
Installation procedure:
Warning: All connections should be made with the power supply off. Make sure that the
shelf is not connected to a power source.
The installation principle is described hereafter (see Figure 3.88):
- position the -48 V battery converter (slot 1 on the right side of the shelf), flush with the 6 screw
holes,
- attach the -48 V battery converter using the 6 M3x6 CBLZ stainless steel screws,
- connect the two secondary internal power cables to the motherboard,
- connect the power supply cable to the J101 connector (HE501, 25-way male) of the -48 V
battery converter.
The pinout of the -48V converter J101 connector is given in Table 3.29 below.
-48V Battery Converter
Connector: J101
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------------
14----------------------
2---------------------------------------------
15----------------------
3--------------------------------------------- -48V1
16---------------------- -48V1
4--------------------------------------------- -48V1
17---------------------- -48V1
5--------------------------------------------- ALM MN
18---------------------- OBS
6--------------------------------------------- OBS
19----------------------
7--------------------------------------------- ALM MJ
20---------------------- -48S
8--------------------------------------------- -48S
21----------------------
9--------------------------------------------- OB1
22---------------------- OB1
10------------------------------------------- OB1
23---------------------- OB1
11------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
24---------------------- 0V/MGND
12------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
25---------------------- 0V/MGND
13------------------------------------------- 0V/MGND
Table 3.29 - Connector J101, -48V Battery Converter
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-128
1
1
2 3
4
screw (M3x4)
Flat stainless steel washer (M3)
Reversible mounting bracket *
* : Reprsentation of the reversible mounting brackets for the 19"Rack.
4 plastic feet
Reversible mounting bracket *
Figure 3.89 - FMX 4 - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19"Rack
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-129
(MaJor or MiNor)
ALARM
LEDs
ALARM STATUS
(Major or Minor)
1
2
3
4
assembly kit:
. CLS M3x4 screws
. Plastic feet
2
4
4
4
Table 3.30 - 19"or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
bracket to the vertical (see Figure 3.89).
- Position the reversible adapter bracket (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure
(item 3).
NOTE: In 19" and ETSI racks, plastic feet are not mounted.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-130
5
6
4U
1
2
5

m
m

(
E
T
S
I

R
a
c
k
)
1
0
1

m
m

(
1
9
"

R
a
c
k
)
2 cage
nuts (M6)
FMX 4 SHELF
L-H side
vertical member
Hexagonal head
Figure 3.90 - FMX 4 - 19" or ETSI Rack-mounting shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-131
19" or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly (Figure 3.90)
Assembly principle:
- position the empty shelf, slide it in until the shelf reversible adapter brackets come in contact
with the rack risers, secure using the cage nuts and M6x12 hex-head screws (item 6).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-132
-48V
-48V1
-48S
-48VS
Secondary
voltages
Protection OB1
Protection
OBS
Primary
voltages
Svce Gbd
POWER
EQUIPMENT
Fail
Power converter
STATION ALARMS
VIS MAJ ALM Major alarm Visual
0V
Chassis
ground
Tertiary
voltages
VIS MIN ALM
AUD MAJ ALM
AUD MIN ALM
Minor alarm
Service
GND
Visual
Audible
Audible
Service
GND
The relays are closed
when the alarm is
present.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-133
Power distribution is provided by a -48V battery converter.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-134
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
1B
2
3
4
5
6
7
P101A
P102B
Connector
with 6.35
faston contacts
-48V Battery
Converter
Power and Alarm
bus Bar
(PABB)
Figure 3.92 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Rack-mounting shelf equipped
with a -48V Battery Converter
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-135
L = 70 cm
3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
P101A
P102B
A
B
5
4
1
2
3
4
2 1
A
B
6013235
5
BDA side
Chassis ground
Major Alarm Extn
Cable
Cable no.
Chassis ground
Minor Alarm Extn
Service ground
Figure 3.93 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector
L = 70 cm
3
2
6012721
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A
4
1
2
3
4
J1
Ali/PWR
BDA side
Cable
Cable no.
Shelf side
Power supply
filter
Chassis ground
Signal ground
Service ground
Figure 3.94 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-136
J101
J102 J103 J104 J105 J106 J107 J108 J109
J120 J121
J110 J111 J112 J113 J114
J122
J
1
2
3
J115 J116 J117
LED/DEL
Ala/ Alm
-48VS
OBS
Ala DsJ
Ala MJ1
Ala MJ2
Ala Mn1
Ala Mn2
Mm/ Gnd
TB2 TB1
Mm/ Gnd
J118
1234
J119
12345678
1234
1234567812345678
3 2 1
OBS
Z
Y
J1
J2
FMX 4 Shelf (or MD COMPACT) equipped with a
Power Supply of the -48V Battery Converter Type
Power Supply Cable
Figure 3.95 - ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution (PAPA G2 or PAPE G2)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-137
ETSI Rack Power Distribution
The ETSI rack power distribution principle is given in the PAPA G2 (PAPE G2) user guide and
shown in Figure 3.95.
The Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PAPA G2) or Remote Protection Alarm Panel
(PAPE G2) is located in the upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes a
distribution card which allows:
- the protection of secondary voltages (PAPA G2 only) from the power unit of the station and
the distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 25 A circuit-breakers to the equipment (the
calibration of the -48V is 2 A,,
The shelf is connected to the PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 by a power cable equipped with a female
1
2
3 3
2 1
Ali/PWR 6012261
3
Cable
PAPA G2 side
Cable no.
L = 1.3 or 2.5m
according to use.
1
2
3
3
2 1
Ali/PWR
L = 3m
6012711
Free ends
Cable
Cable no.
Power supply side
Figure 3.97 -"Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf)
Blue- White
Yellow- White
OBS : Black-White
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-138
J5 J6 J7
J8 J9 J10
J11
J14
J44
J41
J12
J15
J45
J42
J13
J16
J46
J43
J2
J1
J4
J3
J104 J103 J102 J101
J201 J202 J203 J204
J304 J303 J302 J301
J401 J402 J403 J404
J504 J503 J502 J501
J601 J602 J603 J604
COB
Card
GIE
Card
5V
53V
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 6
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 15
Slot 6
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 3
Slot
16
Slot 1
Shelf Front Panel
Slot 3
4

P
o
r
t

C
a
r
d
s

S
l
o
t
s
C
o
m
m
o
n
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

U
n
i
t
s
Shelf Rear Panel
COB
Card
GIE
Card
Synch./SEM/LBT ETHERNET LT-GIE LT/MODEM
Alarm Loops TMN P2 Interface P1 Interface
4

P
o
r
t

C
a
r
d
s

S
l
o
t
s
C
o
m
m
o
n
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

U
n
i
t
s
Figure 3.98 -Connection Location - Rear Connection FMX4 Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-139
The external connections are made at the back of the shelf. The different equipment cards are
inserted inside the shelf, in the 6 marked slots and one slot reserved for the power converter.
Only slots 03 and 06 are general purpose and can receive port cards; the 2 other slots are not
general purpose and receive the common equipment units (COB and GIE-S).
The type of card present or not present in slots 03 to 06 depends on the configuration selected
by the operator.
This paragraph is intended to detail the connectors associated with each slot (in particular with
the general purpose slots) and, for each port type, the nature of the signals and the pin
connections.
3.3.4.1 Slot/connector Association
The table below defines the allocation of each connector on the connection and specifies the
distribution of line access connectors according to the slots (refer to Figure 3.98).
Slot Numbers Card Name Connectors (external ports)
01 -48V Battery Converter J101: Power Supply Filter
Ports cards (optional):
- 3 64 I
Connector Grouping
03 - BBTxRx, J101 J102 J103 J104
- 2MU,
04 - A2S, J201 J202 J203 J204
- 6PAFC,
05 - V24/V11, J301 J302 J303 J304
- V24/V28 or 4VAS,
06 - 2w2B1Q, J401 J402 J403 J404
- Subscr
- Exchan
- CONF
- 4U TRANSFIX, IADB or ETH.
15 Operations Interface Card (GIE-S) J601: Loops-Alarms
J602: TNM Ports
J603: P2 Interface
J604: P1 Interface*
16 COnnections, Timing Circuit and
J501: CT/MODEM
J502: CT/GIE
J504: SYNCH.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-140
Right Rear
Connectors of the
Rear Panel: J101,
J201, J301 and J401
6PAFC 3 64 I 2MU A2S BBTxRx 2w2B1Q* Subscr
and
Exchan
1---------------------
14--------
2---------------------
15--------
3---------------------
16--------
4---------------------
17--------
5---------------------
18--------
6---------------------
Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21--------
9---------------------
22--------
10-------------------
23--------
11-------------------
24--------
12-------------------
25--------
13-------------------
* : 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Card.
Table 3.32 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
2w2B1Q, SubScr and Exchan Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-141
Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2)
Tx L (3-2)
|
on interface no. 3
Ex: Tx L (1-1)
Tx L (1-2)
Type of connectors: 25-way HE5.
- Table 3.32: Signals available on the J101, J201, J301 and J401 right rear connectors
when the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, Subscr
and Exchan cards,
- Table 3.33: Signals available on the J101, J201, J301 and J401 right rear connectors
when the slot is equipped with V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS, IADB or ETH
cards,
- Table 3.34: Signals available on the J102, J202, J302 and J402 right center connectors
and Exchan cards,
- Table 3.35: Signals available on the J102, J202, J302 and J402 right center connectors
cards,
- Table 3.36: Signals available on the J103, J203, J303 and J403 left center connectors
and Exchan cards,
- Table 3.37: Signals available on the J103, J203, J303 and J4031 left center connectors
cards,
- Table 3.38: Signals available on the J104, J204, J304 and J404 left rear connectors
and Exchan cards,
- Table 3.39: Signals available on the J104, J204, J304 and J404 left rear connectors
cards,
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-142
Right Rear Connectors
Of the Rear Panel
J101, J201, J301 and J401
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS IADB ETH
1---------------------
14--------
2---------------------
15--------
3---------------------
16--------
4---------------------
17--------
5---------------------
18--------
6---------------------
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21--------
9---------------------
22--------
10-------------------
23--------
11-------------------
24--------
12-------------------
25--------
13-------------------
Not
Used
108-J4
0V/MGND (101-J4)
107-J4
106-J4
0V/MGND
140-J4
102-J4
142-J4
141-J4
109-J4
104-J4
115-J4
105-J4
114-J4
103-J4
108-J4
0V/MGND (101-J4)
107-J4
106-J4
0V/MGND
140-J4
102-J4
142-J4
141-J4
109-J4
104RA-J4
104RB-J4
105-J4
103TA-J4
103TB-J4
Not
Used
Not
Used
Table 3.33 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: V24/V11,
V24/V28, 4VAS, IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-143
Right Center
Connectors of the
Rear Panel: J102,
J202, J302 and J402
and
Exchan
1---------------------
M A (3) Rx L Sig (3.1) LP 3.1
14--------
M B (3) Rx L Sig (3.2) LP 3.2
2---------------------
E B (6)
15-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------
E A (3) Tx L Sig (3.1) LP 4.1
16--------
E A (6)
4---------------------
E B (3) Tx L Sig (3.2) LP 4.2
17-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
5---------------------
M B (6)
18--------
6---------------------
M A (6) Unused Unused Unused
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21-------- Tx L (3.2)
STx L (3.2)
Tx L (3.2)
9---------------------
Tx L (6.2)
22--------
10-------------------
Tx L (3.1) STx L (3.1)
Tx L (3.1)
23-------- Tx L (6.1)
11-------------------
24--------
Rx L (3.2) SRx L (3.2) Rx L (3.2)
12-------------------
Rx L (6.2)
25--------
Rx L (6.1)
13-------------------
Rx L (3.1) SRx L (3.1) Rx L (3.1)
** : 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Card.
Table 3.34 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU,
A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-144
Right Center Connectors
Of the Rear Panel
J102, J202, J302 and J402
V24/V11 V24/V28 4VAS
IADB
ETH
1---------------------
14--------
2---------------------
15--------
3---------------------
16--------
4---------------------
17--------
5---------------------
18--------
6---------------------
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21--------
9---------------------
22--------
10-------------------
23--------
11-------------------
24--------
12-------------------
25--------
13-------------------
Ba-J3
Bb-J3
106-J3
101-J3
109a-J3
140-J3
109b-J3
0V/MGND
105b-J3
107-J3
105a-J3
102-J3
142-J3
141-J3
108-J3
104b-J3
115b-J3
102a-J3
104a-J3
115a-J3
102b-J3
103b-J3
114b-J3
114a-J3
103a-J3
106-J4
108-J3
0V/MGND (101-J3)
107-J3
140-J4
106-J3
0V/MGND
140-J3
102-J3
142-J3
141-J3
102-J4
109-J3
115-J4
104-J3
115-J3
105-J3
114-J4
114-J3
103-J3
106-J4
108-J3
0V/MGND (101-J3)
107-J3
140-J4
106-J3
0V/MGND
140-J3
102-J3
142-J3
141-J3
102-J4
109-J3
104RB-J4
104RA-J3
104RB-J3
105-J3
103TA-J4
103TA-J3
103TB-J3
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
RX+()
RX-()
TX+()
TX-()
Rx L (3.2)
Rx L (3.1)
Tx (2.2)
Rx L (4.1)
Tx (2.1)
Rx L (4.2)
Rx L (2.2)
Rx L (2.1)
Tx (4.2)
Rx L (1.2)
Tx (4.1)
Rx L (1.1)
Tx (3.1)
Tx (1.2)
Tx (1.1)
Tx (3.1)
Table 3.35 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28,
4VAS, IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-145
Left Center
Connectors of the
Rear Panel: J103,
J203, J303 and J403
and
Exchan
1---------------------
M A (2) Rx L Sig (2.1) LP 2.1
14--------
M B (2) Rx L Sig (2.2) LP 2.2
2---------------------
E B (5)
15-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------
E A (2) Tx L Sig (2.1) LP 5.1
16--------
E A (5)
4---------------------
E B (2) Tx L Sig (2.2) LP 5.2
17-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
5---------------------
M B (5)
18--------
6---------------------
M A (5) Unused Unused
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21-------- Tx L (2.2)
S Tx L (2.2)
Tx L (2.2) U (4.2)**
9---------------------
Tx L (5.2)
22--------
10-------------------
Tx L (2.1) S Tx L (2.1)
Tx L (2.1)
U (4.1)**
23-------- Tx L (5.1)
11-------------------
24--------
Rx L (2.2) SRx L (2.2) Rx L (2.2) U (3.2)**
12-------------------
Rx L (5.2)
25--------
Rx L (5.1)
13-------------------
Rxc L (2.1) SRx L (2.1) Rx L (2.1) U (3.1)**
** : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
Table 3.36 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-146
Left Center
Connectors
of the Rear Panel
J103, J203, J303 and
J403
1---------------------
14--------
2---------------------
15--------
3---------------------
16--------
4---------------------
17--------
5---------------------
18--------
6---------------------
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21--------
9---------------------
22--------
10-------------------
23--------
11-------------------
24--------
12-------------------
25--------
13-------------------
Ba-J2
Bb-J2
106-J2
101-J2
109a-J2
140-J2
109b-J2
0V/MGND
105b-J2
107-J2
105a-J2
102-J2
142-J2
141-J2
108-J2
104b-J2
115b-J2
102a-J2
104a-J2
115a-J2
102b-J2
103b-J2
114b-J2
114a-J2
103a-J2
109-J4
108-J2
142-J4
0V/MGND (101-J2)
107-J2
106-J2
0V/MGND
140-J2
102-J2
142-J2
141-J2
109-J2
107-J4
104-J2
115-J2
105-J2
108-J4
114-J2
103-J2
109-J4
108-J2
142-J4
0V/MGND (101-J2)
107-J2
106-J2
0V/MGND
140-J2
102-J2
142-J2
141-J2
109-J2
107-J4
104RA-J2
104RB-J2
105-J2
108-J4
103TA-J2
103TB-J2
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Rx+()
Rx-()
Tx+()
TxX-()
Not Used
Table 3.37 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: V24/V11,
V24/V28, 4VAS, IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-147
Left Rear Connectors of
the Rear Panel: J104,
J204, J304 and J404
and
Exchan
1---------------------
M A (1) Rx L Sig (1.1) LP 1.1
14--------
M B (1) Rx L Sig (1.2) LP 1.2
2---------------------
E B (4)
15-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
3---------------------
E A (1) Tx L Sig (1.1) LP 6.1
16--------
E A (4)
4---------------------
E B (1) Tx L Sig (1.2) LP 6.2
17-------- 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
5---------------------
M B (4)
18--------
6---------------------
M A (4)
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21-------- Tx L (1.2)
S Tx L (1.2)
Tx L (1.2) Em L (1.2) Tx L (1.2) U (2.2)
9---------------------
Tx L (4.2) Em L (4.2)
22--------
10-------------------
Tx L (1.1) S Tx L (1.1)
Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1) Tx L (1.1)
U (2.1)
23-------- Tx L (4.1) Tx L (4.1)
11-------------------
24--------
Rx L (1.2) SRx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2) Rx L (1.2) U (1.2)
12-------------------
Rx L (4.2) Rx L (4.2)
25--------
Rx L (4.1)
Rx L (4.1)
13-------------------
Rx L (1.1) SRx L (1.1) Rx L (1.1) Rxc L (1.1) Rx L (1.1) U (1.1)
Table 3.38 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S,
BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-148
Left Rear Connectors
Of the Rear Panel
J104, J204, J304 and
J404
1---------------------
14--------
2---------------------
15--------
3---------------------
16--------
4---------------------
17--------
5---------------------
18--------
6---------------------
19--------
7---------------------
20--------
8---------------------
21--------
9---------------------
22--------
10-------------------
23--------
11-------------------
24--------
12-------------------
25--------
13-------------------
Ba-J1
Bb-J1
106-J1
101-J1
109a-J1
140-J1
109b-J1
0V/MGND
105b-J1
107-J1
105a-J1
102-J1
142-J1
141-J1
108-J1
104b-J1
115b-J1
102a-J1
104a-J1
115a-J1
102b-J1
103b-J1
114b-J1
114a-J1
103a-J1
105-J4
108-J1
0V/MGND (101-J1)
107-J1
106-J1
0V/MGND (101-J4)
140-J1
102-J1
142-J1
141-J1
141-J4
109-J1
104-J4
104-J1
115-J1
105-J1
103-J4
114-J1
103-J1
105-J4
108-J1
0V/MGND (101-J1)
107-J1
106-J1
0V/MGND (101-J4)
140-J1
102-J1
142-J1
141-J1
141-J4
109-J1
104RA-J4
104RA-J1
104RB-J1
105-J1
103TB-J4
103TA-J1
103TB-J1
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Rx+()
Rx-()
Tx+()
Tx-()
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Rx+()
Rx-()
Tx+()
Tx-()
Table 3.39 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28, 4VAS,
IADB and ETH Cards
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-149
Cables Used
Keys for signal names: Px; Pair n, Qx; Quad n,
Color abbreviation:
Bl: Black, B: Blue, Br: Brown, C: Colorless, G: Green, Gr: Gray , , O: Orange, P: Purple, R: Red,
, Y: Yellow, W: White.
Cables for the BBTxRx card
The cables used for the BBTxRx, A2ME, 2w2B1Q, and A2S cards are identified in the table
below. According to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
55050173 Connection cable for the BBTxRx, A2ME, 2.5 m 55670314
2w2B1Q, and A2S cards (two port) 5 m 55670315
(Quantity : 1/card) 12 m 55670316
24.8 m 55670317
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050173
1
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
GY
WH
BU
VT
VT
WH
BU
GY
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.99 - Cable for connecting BBTxRx Card (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-150
The cables used for the A2S card 4 port connection are identified in the table below. According
to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.among these three options.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050169 1 cable for four 120 ports 2.5 m 55670298
5 m 55670299
12 m 55670300
24.8 m 55670301
including :
55680318
two 75 adaptater cables (one port) 1.5 m 55670678
ports
including :
55680318
two 75 adaptater cables (one port) 0.5 m 55670608
a 120 Adaptater AM101219
Designation
(L)
Card
Quantity
55050169 A2S Card
75 ohms adapter cable
120 ohms adapter
2.5 m
5 m
12 m
24.8 m
0.5 m
55670298
55670299
55670300
55670301
55670xxx
1
1
1
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-151
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050169
A
B
1
J
X
0
2
J X03
J
X
0
4
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P1
Q2-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q2-P1
Q2-P1
A
B
WH
BN
GY
VT
VT
BN
WH
GY
VT
BU
VT
BU
GY
YE
GY
YE
Figure 3.100 - Cable for connecting A2S Card (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-152
500 mm
B1
B2
B
C
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
B1
B2
Em L2/Em L3
Rec L2/Rec L3
3
4
Em L2/
Em L3
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
17
24
10
9
Rec L2/
Rec L3
Item
Marking
55670xxx
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L2
Out Em L2
A
B
C
Wiring diagram
Coaxial female 1.6/5.6 connectors
Cable
Connector
Jx03/Jx04
See table
Green wi re
connecting
the coaxi al cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
55670xxx
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L3
Out Em L3
Jx03 Jx04
Figure 3.101 - 75 ohms adapter cable
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-153
500 mm
B1
B2
B3
B4
B
C
D
E
A
1
2
3
4
2
1
Em L4
Rec L4
Rec L1
Em L1
B1
B2
B3
B4
Em L1
Em L4
Rec L1
Rec L4
3
4
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
17
24
10
9
A
B
C
D
E
Item Marking Low
55670567
2 Mbit/s port
In Rec L1
In Rec L4
Out Em L4
Out Em L1
Wiring diagram
Cable
Connector
Jx02
See table
Green wire
connecting
the coaxial cable
grounding braid
Cable clamp
Figure 3.102 - 75 ohms adapter cable
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-154
2
3
4
5
1
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14
16
9
11
12
18
17
10
24
23
21
19
15
Jx03
Jx04
Jx02
J2
J3
J4
J1
2
3
4
5
1
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14
16
9
11
12
18
17
10
24
23
21
19
15
2
3
4
5
1
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Jx04
J4
J1
FMX4 side
3 HE5 connectors
(25-way male)
4 HE5 connectors
(9-way femelle)
120 ohms port side
120 ohms
Adapter
Unit fixing screw
Unit fixing screw
Wiring diagram
Out Em 3.1
Out Em 3.2
In Rec 3.1
Item
Connectors
Cover
ground
A
B
C
D
Jx02 - J3 Jx03 - J2
In Rec 2.2
Out Em 2.1
Out Em 2.2
In Rec 2.1
Jx02
or
Jx03
(see table)
In Rec 3.2
In Rec 1.2
Out Em 1.1
Out Em 1.2
In Rec 1.1
In Rec 4.2
In Rec 4.1
Out Em 4.1
Out Em 4.2
Screen
Cover
ground
J3 or J2
Screen
Figure 3.103 -120 ohms adapter
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-155
Cables for the 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX card
The cables used for the 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX cards are identified in the table below.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No. Card
Quantity
55050170 Connection cable for the 2.5 m 55670302 1 by 2f2B1Q card
2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX 5 m 55670303 2 by 4UTRANSFIX
cards 12 m 55670304 card
24.8 m 55670305
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050170
1
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
BU
VT
WH
GY
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-156
The cables used for the 3 64 I cards are identified in the table below. According to the type of
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050177 Connection cable for the 3 64 I card 2.5 m 55670332
12 m 55670334
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050177
A
C
1
J
X
0
2
J X03
J
X
0
4
L
B
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P2
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
Q2-P1
Q2-P2
Q2-P1
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
C
B
A
VT
GY
WH
BU
WH
VT
WH
VT
BU
VT
BU
VT
VT
GY
YE
BN
YE
GY
YE
GY
VT
GY
BK
RD
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
A
C
B
Legend :
Tx
Rx
Tx Sig/Rx Sig
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-157
Cables for the V24/V28 or 4VAS card
The cables used for the V24/V28 or 4VAS card (in V28 operation mode) is identified in the table
below. According to the type of engineering, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
V24/V28 adapter for DTE connection (1/channel) 55620213
V24/V28 adapter for DCE connection (1/channel) 55620214
Extension cable for adapter (straight cable) 1.5 m 4 980 210
3 m 4 980 209
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14

5
5

6
2
0

2
1
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14
16
108
101
107
106
140
102
142
141
109
115
104
103
114
142
140
108
141
115
114
101
103
104
105
106
107
102
109
105
One DCE
Connection (Terminal)
Wiring diagram
HE 502 plug connector
(25-pin)
(25-way female)
Port Cards side
Figure 3.106 - V24/V28 adapter for DTE Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-158
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14

5
5

6
2
0

2
1
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13 25
14
16
108
101
107
106
140
102
142
141
109
104
103
114
106
142
114
104
105
102
105
101
103
109
140
141
107
108
One DCE
Connection (Modem)
Wiring diagram
(25-pin)
(25-pin)
Port Cards side
Figure 3.107 - V24/V28 adapter for DCE Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-159
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
4
4 980 XXX
L
1
2
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14 1
2
7
25
3
4
5
6
13
14
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable
Figure 3.108 - Extension cable for adaptater (straight cable)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-160
card can be used.
The cables used for the 4VAS cards are identified in the table below. According to the type of
Std Plan No. Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
251757853 1/2 connection cable for 2;5 m 251757949
12 m 251757960
7 8 7
25
=
L
=
4VAS
142
141
104 RA
104 RB
103 TA
103 TB
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
108
102
109
105 J1
4 2 1
25 PTS M
4VAS
GY
BK
VT
GY
YE
VT
BU
GY
WH
VT
GY
GN
VT
GY
VT
END A
END B
See Detail
END B
END A
WIRING SIDE VIEW
Braid connected
Braid connected
0V/MGND (101)
107
106
0V/MGND
140
Figure 3.109 - 1/2 cable for the interface connection of 4VAS card
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-161
Cables for the V24/V11 card
The cables used for the V24/V11 card are identified in the table below. According to the nature
of the interface in opposite, the user will choose the suitable cable or adapter.
Std Plan
No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
Card
Quantity
Connection for the V24/V11 card
V24/V11Adaptater (ISO 2110 connector) 55620215 1
V24/V11-V36 adapter cable (37-way) 1.5 m 55670330-1M5 1
V24/V11 (V35) adapter cable 1.5 m 55670459-1M5 1
3-V35 port adapter AM101220 1
1mm/1.6 mm adapter for V35 Interface 6 486 885 1
V24/V11 (X24/V11) adapter cable (15-
way)
1.5 m 55670331-1M5 1
Extension cable for adapter (See V24/V28 1.5 m 4 980 210 1
card cable) 3 m 4 980 209
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14

5
5

6
2
0

2
1
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14
16
101
109A
109B
105B
102
142
141
104B
115A
104A
103A
114A 142
140
108
141
115A
114A
101
103A
104A
105A
106
107
102/102B
109A
140
107
102A
106
105A
108
115B
114B
103B
102B
103B
104B
105B
102A
109B
115B
114B
Cable side
Connection diagram
(25-way male)
(25-way female)
Port Cards side
L = 65 cm appro.
Figure 3.110 - V25/V11 adapter (ISO 2110 connector)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-162
1
2
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
Q1 P1 F2
Q2 P1 F1
Q1 P2 F2
Q3 P2 F1
Q5 P2 F1
Q6 P1 F1
Q5 P2 F2
55670330-1M5 55670330-1M5
Q2 P2 F1
Q3 P1 F2
Q4 P1 F1
Q4 P2 F1
Q5 P1 F1
Q1 P1 F1
1
2
7
37
3
4
5
6
19
20
8
9
10
12
13
14
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
30
31
11
1
2
25
13
14
18
19
21
22
24
15
16 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
23 10
11
12
Q1 P1 F1
Q2 P1 F2
Q4 P1 F2
Q4 P2 F2
Q5 P1 F2
Q4 P1 F2
Q2 P2 F2
Q3 P1 F1
Q3 P2 F2
Q6 P1 F2
Q1 P2 F1
Q5 P2 F2
Q5 P2 F1
Q5 P1 F2
Q5 P1 F1
Q4 P2 F2
Q4 P2 F1
Q6 P1 F1
Q6 P1 F2
Q3 P1 F2
Q3 P2 F1
Q3 P2 F2
Q1 P1 F2
Q1 P2 F1
Q1 P2 F2
Q2 P1 F1
Q2 P1 F2
Q2 P2 F1
Q2 P2 F2
Q3 P1 F1
Q4 P1 F1
Q4 P1 F2
Cable
Cable reference
Cable length
Wiring diagram
1.5 m
Figure 3.111 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-163
1
2
3
2
4
1
4
3
A B
F
L
R
V
Z
DD
JJ
NN
D
J
N
T
X
BB
FF
LL
E
K
P
C
H
M
U
Y
CC
HH
MM
S
W
EE
KK
AA
106
141
115a
114a
140
107
102
103(b)
109
105
142
108
115b
104(a)
104(b)
103(a)
101
141
115a
114a
140
107
102
103(b)
101
109
106
105
142
108
115b
104(a)
114b
103(a)
114b
55670459
Q1-P1
Q3-P1
Q4-P2
Q3-P2
1
2 15
7
25
21
20
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
22
24
104(b) Q5-P1*
Q2-P2
Q2-P1
Q1-P2 Q1-P1
Q2-P1
Q4-P2
Q4-P1
Q1-P2
Q3-P1
Q3-P2
Q2-P2
Q4-P1
23
9
10
Q5-P1*
Cable
FMX12 Side
Wiring diagram
Cable number
1.50 m
1.6mm female way connection is
possible via adapter no. 6 486 885
* Pair 2 of quarte 5 is not connected.
Figure 3.112 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (V35) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-164
Q1 P1 F1
1
2
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
Q1 P1 F2
Q1 P2 F1
Q1 P2 F2
Q2 P1 F1
Q2 P1 F2
Q2 P2 F1
Q2 P2 F2
Q3 P1 F1
Q3 P1 F2
Q3 P2 F1
Q3 P2 F2
Q4 P1 F1
Q4 P1 F2
Q1 P1 F1
Q1 P1 F2
Q1 P2 F1
Q1 P2 F2
Q2 P1 F1
Q2 P1 F2
Q2 P2 F1
Q2 P2 F2
Q3 P1 F1
Q3 P1 F2
Q3 P2 F1
Q3 P2 F2
Q4 P1 F1
Q4 P1 F2
55670331-1M5 55670331-1M5
1
2 15
25
21
19
3
4
5
6
14
22
24
23
9
12
1
2
14
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
12
13
10
11
15
13
10
Cable
Cable reference
Cable length
Wiring diagram
1.5 m
Figure 3.113 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-165
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
26
21
22
23
24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
20
22
13
25
14
16
9
11
12
18
17
10
Bb
25
19
18
14
31
13
12
11
10
9
37
24
23
21
19
15
101
140a
0V/Mm
107
102
141
104b
102a
115a
103b
114a
Ba
106
109a
109b
105b
105a
142
108
115b
104a
102b
114b
103a
J104
101 0V/Mm
102b
Bb
103b
114b
104b
105b
115b
119b
102a
102
142
109a
140
108
107
141
106
115a
105a
104a
114a
103a
Ba
J3
J103 J2
J102
J1
J103
J104
J101*
J3
J102
J2
J1
* Connector J101 is not used.
FMX4 side
4 HE5 connectors
(25-way male)
3 HE5 connectors
(37-way femelle)
V35 Interface side
V35 Interface
Adapter
Unit fixing screw
Unit fixing screw
Wiring diagram
Figure 3.114 - 3-V35 port adapter
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-166
Cables for ETH card
The cables used for the ETH card are identified in the following table. According to the type of
Std
Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No. Card
Quantity
RJ45 25-way adapter (1 Ethernet port)
Identical to the IADB card
_ 55670198 1
ETH card A2S card connection cable for
1x2 Mbit/s port
2 m 251748630 1
ETH card A2S card connection cable for
4x2 Mbit/s ports
2 m 251748622 1
5
5
6
7
0
1
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+ ( )
RX+ ( )
TX- ( )
RX- ( )
1
2
15
7
25
20
21
18
17
3
4
5
6
13
B
Wiring diagram
HE5 connector
(25-way male)
RJ45 connector
(8-way female)
FMX4 Rear left
connector side
(JX04)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-167
25 PTS M
1 3 6 1 3 6
A2S ETH
25
7 8 7 7
200
= =
25
25 PTS M
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
RX1_1
RX1_2
TX1_1
TX1_2
RX1_1
RX1_2
TX1_1
TX1_2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
END A END B
CabIe identification
See dtail
WIRING SIDE VIEW
END A
SLOT ETH SLOT A2S
END B
Braid connected
Braid connected
Figure 3.116 - ETH card A2S card connection cable for 1x2 Mbit/s port
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-168
20 30
100
25
7 5
4
4
7
7
1
1 3
3
6
6
100
ETH
1 3 6
7
RX3_1
RX3_2
TX3_1
TX3_2
Q3-P2-F1
Q3-P2-F2
Q3-P1-F1
Q3-P1-F2
TX2_1
TX2_2
RX2_1
RX2_2
Q2-P1-F1
Q2-P1-F2
Q2-P2-F1
Q2-P2-F2
TX2_1
TX2_2
Q2-P2-F1
Q2-P2-F2
Q4-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
Q3-P2-F1
Q3-P2-F2
TX4_1
TX4_2
TX3_1
TX3_2
Q3-P1-F1
Q3-P1-F2
Q4-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
Q2-P1-F1
Q2-P1-F2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
25
8
RX1_1
RX1_2
TX1_1
TX1_2
Q1-P1-F1
Q1-P1-F2
Q1-P2-F1
Q1-P2-F2
Q4-P1-F1
Q4-P1-F2
Q4-P2-F1
Q4-P2-F2
RX4_1
RX4_2
TX4_1
TX4_2
25 PTS M
6 3 1
25 PTS M
END A END B
See detail 1
See detail 2
WIRING SIDE VIEW
END A
ETH SLOT
RIGHT CENTER
LEFT CENTER
Braid connected
LEFT REAR
SLOT A2S
EXT. B
RIGHT CENTER END - 1 Quad
in a t ubular braid
R
IG
H
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
LEFT CENTER
L
E
F
T
R
E
A
R
LEFT REAR END - 1 Quad
in a t ubular braid
LEFT REAR END - 2 Quads
in a t ubular braid
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Braid connected
Figure 3.117 - ETH card A2S card connection cable for 4x2 Mbit/s ports
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-169
Cables for the 6PAFC card
The cables used for the 6PAFC card is identified in the table below. According to engineering to
be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050171 Connection cables for the carte 6PAFC card 2.5 m 55670306
12 m 55670308
24.8 m 55670309
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050171
A
C
1
J
X
0
2
J X03
J
X
0
4
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
C
B
B
P7
P1
P10
P4
P1
P4
P1
P4
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
P8
P2
P11
P5
P2
P5
P2
P5
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
P9
P3
P12
P6
P3
P6
P3
P6
A
WH WH WH
BU
WH
GN
RD
OG
BK
WH
BN
BU
BN
WH
BU
BN
WH
WH
OG
WH
BN
RD
GN
BK
RD
BU
OG
BU
RD
OG
BU
WH
RD
GN
WH
BU
BK
BN
BK
RD
OG
GN
OG
RD
GN
OG
WH
RD
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Legend :
Tx 4 w
Rx Ex/Rx 2 w
E&M
A
C
B
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-170
Cables for the Subscr and Exchan
The cables used for the Subscr and Exchan cards are identified in the table below. According to
engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050174 Connection cables for the Subscr and 2.5 m 55670318
Exchan cards 5 m 55670319
(Quantity : 1/card) 12 m 55670320
24.8 m 55670321
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050174
1
J
X
0
2
J X03
J
X
0
4
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
P1
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
P6
P2
P5
P3
P4
WH
RD
OG
BU
WH
RD
BU
OG
WH
WH
BN
GN
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
Figure 3.119 - Cable for Subscr and Exchan Cards Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-171
Rear Panel Connection
Connector: J601
Signal Name
1-------------------------------------------- TSIG1A
14----------------------
2--------------------------------------------- TSIG1B
15---------------------- TSIG2A
3---------------------------------------------
16---------------------- TSIG2B
4---------------------------------------------
17---------------------- TSIG3A
5--------------------------------------------- OV/MGND
18---------------------- TSIG3B
6--------------------------------------------- GTR
19----------------------
7---------------------------------------------
20----------------------
8--------------------------------------------- Common Point (CP)
21----------------------
9---------------------------------------------
22---------------------- REMCON2_C
10------------------------------------------- REMCON 1_C
23---------------------- REMCON 2_B
11------------------------------------------- REMCON 1_B
24----------------------
12-------------------------------------------
25---------------------- REMCON 2_A
13------------------------------------------- REMCON 1_A
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-172
Cable for GTR interface, remote control and remote monitoring item connection
The cables used for GTR interface, remote control and remote monitoring item connection are
identified in the table below. According to engineering to be respected, the user will choose the
suitable cable.
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050172 Connection cable for GTR interface, remote 2.5 m 55670310
control and remote monitoring item 5 m 55670311
connection 12 m 55670312
(Quantity : 1/shelf) 24.8 m 55670313
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050172
1
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
P7
P6
P5
P4
P2
P3
P1
OG
RD
GN
RD
OG
RD
BU
WH
BN
WH
GN
WH
BU
WH
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-173
two ways:
Absent Open Closed
Present Closed Open
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-174
3.3.4.4 Operating interface
Three V.24 ports are available depending on the equipment connected:
- connector J1 on GIE-S front panel
- connector J502 on shelf rear panel for a local CT,
- connector J501 of the shelf rear panel if the CT is remoted via a modem.
The GIE-S front panel key is used to select the active function for the data inputs; data outputs
are available simultaneously on both interfaces.
GIE-S card front panel and shelf rear panel connectors
The J1 connectors (RJ45, 8-way), located on the front panel of the GIE-S card, and J502
(HE501, 25-way), located on the rear panel of the shelf, are suited to connect a CT; each
junction is compliant with the V.24 and V.28 ITU-T recommendations. They allow the FMX to
behave as a DCE in relation to the terminal. The pin-out of the junctions is given in Table 3.41.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-175
Front Panel
Signal Name
(ITU-T abbreviation) Designation
V.24 Circuit
1 RTS Request To Send () 105 - DCE
2 DTR Data Terminal Ready () 108/2 - DCE
3 TD Transmit Data () 103 - DCE
5 Sig GND Signaling Ground () 102 - DCE
6 RD Receive Data () 104 - DCE
7 DSR Data Set Ready () 107 - DCE
8 CTS Clear To Send () 106 - DCE
Connector J502 on Shelf
Rear Panel
Signal Name
(ITU-T abbreviation) Designation V.24 Circuit
1----------------------------- Ground () 101 -DCE
14-------- TX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ())
2----------------------------- TD Transmit Data () 103 - DCE
15--------
3----------------------------- RD Receive Data () 104 - DCE
16-------- RX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ())
4----------------------------- RTS Request To Send () 105 - DCE
17--------
5----------------------------- CTS Clear To Send () 106 - DCE
18--------
6----------------------------- DSR Data Set Ready () 107 - DCE
19--------
7----------------------------- Sig GND Signaling Ground () 102 - DCE
20-------- DTR Data Terminal Ready () 108/2 - DCE
8-----------------------------
21--------
9-----------------------------
22--------
10---------------------------
23--------
11---------------------------
24--------
12---------------------------
25--------
13---------------------------
Table 3.41 - Connectors J1 on GIE-S Front Panel and J502 ("CT Interface")
on Shelf Rear Panel
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-176
- Local CT Connection Cable: see Figure 3.121 and Figure 3.122.
7
6
3 2
5
3
4
2
8
1
RTS
CTS
DTR
6
7
8
DSR
RXD
TXD
5
1
9
NC
NC
4
2
9
5
3
8
4
7
1
6
251028174 251028174
1
8
1
2
3
3
2
1
1800 20 mm
Cable
Wiring diagram
8-way male
9-way female
Figure 3.121 - Local CT Connection Cable in GIE-S Front Panel
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-177
1
3
4
2
3
4
103
104
105
106
107
102
6993400
2
1
108
109
Wiring diagram
Shelf rear panel side (J502)
Cable
Cable number
PC side
L = 1.80 m
Figure 3.122 - Local CT Connection Cable on Shelf Rear Panel
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-178
Modem port
Connector J501 (HE5, 25-way) is designed for modem connection; the function complies with
ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX4 to behave like a DTE (terminal) with
respect to a DCE (modem).
The interface is provided by the remote "CT/Modem" interface.
Transmission Characteristics
- Bite rate 9600 bps,
CT cable to be connected via a Modem: 25M/25M straight cable No.6 486 877
Shelf Rear Panel
Connector: J501
Signal Name
(ITU-T
abbreviation)
1-----------------------------
14--------
2-----------------------------
TD Transmit Data () 103 - DTE
15--------
3----------------------------- RD Receive Data () 106 - DTE
16--------
4----------------------------- RTS Request To Send () 105 - DTE
17--------
5----------------------------- CTS Clear To Send () 104 - DTE
18--------
6----------------------------- DSR Data Set Ready () 107 - DTE
19--------
7----------------------------- 0V/MGND
20-------- 108 - DTE
8-----------------------------
CD Data Carrier detect on data channel () 109 - DTE
21--------
9-----------------------------
22--------
10---------------------------
23--------
11---------------------------
24--------
12---------------------------
25--------
13---------------------------
Table 3.42 - Connector J501, "CT/ Modem" interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-179
Connector: J504
Signal name
(ITU-T
abbreviation)
Designation
1----------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
14-------- Synchro Out - Synchronization Output
2----------------------------- Synchro Out + Synchronization Output
15--------
3-----------------------------
16-------- Synchro In - Synchronization Input
4-----------------------------
17-------- Synchro In + Synchronization Input
5-----------------------------
18--------
6----------------------------- LTB + Line Test Bus
19--------
7-----------------------------
20-------- OQLTB Line Test Bus Occupation
8----------------------------- LTB - Line Test Bus
21--------
9-----------------------------
22-------- Sem Out - SEM Output
10---------------------------
23-------- Sem Out + SEM Output
11---------------------------
24-------- Sem In - SEM Input
12---------------------------
25-------- Sem In + SEM Input
13--------------------------- 0V/MGND Ground
Table 3.43 - Connector J504, Synchronization
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-180
- Fe = 2048 kHz 50.10
-6
,
to engineering to be respected, the user will choose the suitable cable (Quantity : 1/port).
Std Plan
No.
Designation Length
(L)
Code No.
55050175 One-shelf Synchronization connection cable 2.5 m 55670322
5 m 55670323
12 m 55670324
24.8 m 55670325
3 m 55670374
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050175
1
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
BN
VT
BU
VT
Wiring diagram
Free ends
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-181
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
55050196
1
L
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
4
25
24
23
22
21
20
16
15
14
18
19
17
12
13
11
5
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
Q1-P1
Wiring diagram
Cable
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable Part No.
W
Gr
Figure 3.124 - Two-shelf synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-182
3.3.4.6 - J602 TNM Ports
Connector J602 (HE5, 25-way) provides access to TNM in Ethernet IP mode.
Connector: J602
Signal Name
(ITU-U abbreviation)
1----------------------------- 104-TNM
14--------
2-----------------------------
15--------
3-----------------------------
16-------- 107-TNM
4----------------------------- 102-TNM
17--------
5-----------------------------
18-------- 105-TNM
6-----------------------------
19--------
7-----------------------------
20-------- 114-TNM
8----------------------------- 103-TNM
21--------
9-----------------------------
22-------- 106-TNM
10--------------------------- 108-TNM
23--------
11---------------------------
24-------- 115-TNM
12---------------------------
25--------
13---------------------------
Table 3.44 - Connector J602, TNM Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-183
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-184
3.3.4.7 J603 and J604 P1 and P2 Management Interface Ports
Two connectors J603 and J604 are provided for P2 and P1 management interface connection.
Each interface (V11, 64 kbit/s synchronous type) includes 4 clock/data pairs in transmit and
receive.
Shelf Rear Panel
Connectors: J603 and J604
Signal Name
1----------------------------- 0V/MGND
14-------- RXP2A (RXP1B)
2-----------------------------
15-------- RXP2B (RXP1A)
3-----------------------------
16-------- 0V/MGND
4-----------------------------
17-------- RXCLKP2A (RXCLKP1B)
5-----------------------------
18-------- RXCLKP2B (RXCLKP1A)
6-----------------------------
19-------- 0V/MGND
7-----------------------------
20--------
8-----------------------------
21-------- TXCLKP2A (TXCLKP1A)
9-----------------------------
22-------- TXCLKP2B (TXCLKP1B)
10---------------------------
23-------- 0V/MGND
11---------------------------
24-------- TXP2A (TXP1A)
12---------------------------
25-------- TXP2B (TXP1B)
13--------------------------- 0V/MGND
Table 3.45 - Connectors J603 and J604, TNM Interface
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-185
According to the nature of the interface of P1 management and the type of engineering, the
user will choose the suitable cable.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
55670487 Connection cables for P1 Management 2.5 m 55670487-2M5
Interface connection 5 m 55670487-5M0
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670487-12M
24.8 m 55670487-25M
(Quantity : 1/port)
1
3
2
55670487-
L
1
3
2
J604
Tx
TxCLK
Rx
RxCLK
P1
P1
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
BN
GY
GY
VT
YE
VT
BU
WH
Cable
HE5 Connector (25-way-male)
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Free ends
To P2 of
another
equipment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-186
1
3
4
2
55670493-
L
1
3
4
2
P2
J604
Tx
TxCLK
Rx
RxCLK
P1
GND
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
17
22
24
P2
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
P1
Cable
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-187
According to the nature of the interface of P2 management and the type of engineering, the
user will choose the suitable cable.
Std. Plan
No.
Designation
Length
(L)
Code No.
55670488 Connection cables for P2 Management 2.5 m 55670488-2M5
Interface connection 5 m 55670488-5M0
(Quantity : 1/port) 12 m 55670488-12M
24.8 m 55670488-25M
(Quantity : 1/port)
1
3
2
55670488-
L
1
3
2
J603
Tx
TxCLK
Rx
RxCLK
P2
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
17
22
24
YE
BN
BU
GY
VT
WH
VT
GY
Cable
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
Free ends
To P1 of
another
equipment
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-188
1
3
4
2
55670494-
L
1
3
4
2
P1
J603
Tx
TxCLK
Rx
RxCLK
P2
GND
1
2
15
7
25
21
18
3
4
5
6
13
8
14
17
22
24
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
Cable
Wiring diagram
Cable reference
(length depending)
Cable length
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-189
3.3.4.8 J1 and J2 Secondary Power Supply Ports
Two connectors, J1 (25-way) and J2 (15-way), are provided for powering the shelf cards from
the -48V battery converter inserted in slot 01.
Shelf Motherboard
Connector: J1
Signal Name
1----------------------------- Ground
14-------- Ground
2----------------------------- VDALA
15-------- DEFCNVR
3----------------------------- ALAALI
16-------- Ground
4----------------------------- N5V
17-------- N5V
5----------------------------- N5V
18-------- N5V
6----------------------------- Ground
19-------- Ground
7----------------------------- Ground
20-------- Ground
8----------------------------- P12V
21-------- P12V
9----------------------------- P5V
22-------- P5V
10--------------------------- P5V
23-------- P5V
11--------------------------- P5V
24-------- P5V
12--------------------------- P5V
25-------- P5V
13--------------------------- Ground
Shelf Motherboard
Connector: J2
Signal Name
1----------------------------- Masse
6-------- P53V
2----------------------------- 0V53
7-------- ALAMJ
3----------------------------- N53V
8-------- N53V
4----------------------------- ALAMN
9-------- N48S
5----------------------------- OBS
Table 3.46 - Connector J1 and J2, Secondary Power Supply Ports Interface
3.3.4.9 J3 and J4 Fan Power Supply Ports
Two bar power supply J3 and J4 are provided for fan connection.
The bars are power supplied from connector J1.
3 - START-UP AND CONFIGURATION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-190
3.4 Start-up and Configuration
To facilitate equipment start-up, the operator must define its characteristics (mode of operation,
nominal synchronization unit, etc.) and environment beforehand.
The procedure proposed is the following:
- power-up the shelf and check the power converter cards,
- if the desired mode of operation is different from the standard configuration (factory-set
configuration), configure the cards equipped with link and switch options on their printed
circuits,
- plug the cards into the shelf,
- power-up and check that the entire unit operates correctly via the selftests,
- program the equipment, configure the port cards one by one and create the connections using
the CT, refer to software User Manual No. 252938382-x where x represents the issue number.
On initial configuration and subsequent upgrades, the operator must check consistency
between the local equipment card mode of operation and that of the far-end equipment cards to
ensure correct Signaling management.
REMINDER!
As the cards are protected by antistatic packaging,
before handling, the operator must procure,
and wear an antistatic bracelet
IMPORTANT
The placing of the GIE-S card such that its battery comes in contact
with a metal surface is prohibited. A red label glued on the card
serves as a warning.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-191
3.4.1 Shelf Power-up
Equipment power-up is carried out in two stages:
- power-up of shelf then of power converter(s),
- power-up of other equipment cards from power source and interpretation of results.
Power converters power up
NOTA : Before powering-up converters, be sure that the shelf is fitted with at least one
COB card and one GIE-S card.
The FMX is supplied, depending on the type of shelf used,:
- with -48 VDC from three DC sources (the rated voltage must remain between -40 and -57V)
when a P3 converter is used (FMX12 or FMX9-S),
- with -48 VDC from two DC sources (the rated voltage must remain between -36 and -72V)
when a -48V battery converter is used (FMX4 shelf),
It is necessary to,:
- check primary voltages,
- connect, if required, the primary source to the rack power distribution frame,
- check the power supply protection fuses (-48V battery converter used for the FMX4 shelf),
- insert the power converter(s) or mains unit in the self after checking that their front panel "M-
Ar" switch (ON/OFF) (P3 converter and -48V battery converter) is positioned at "Ar" (indicating
"Off"),
NOTE: Power converters do not require operational adjustment (cf. 3.4.2).
- connect the primary supply, where necessary via the distribution frame, to the power filter or
directly to the 48V battery converter,
- check that the "Def" LED on the front panel of each converter is lit,
- power up the converter(s); the "Def" of each converter should be extinguished.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-192
3.4.2 Card Configuration
3.4.2.1 Power Converter P3 Card
This card does not require any configuration before its startup.
Fuse
Power converter: F1 = 5A
3.4.2.2 -48V battery converter
The -48V battery converter does not require any configuration before commissioning.
Fuse
48V battery converter : 3,15 A delayed-action.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-193
3.4.2.3 GIE-S Card
The factory-set configuration is as follows:
- battery not connected,
- GTR alarm: Sce GND.
NOTE: If the GIE-S card was stored, reconnect the battery as it is necessary for data saving.
On factory outlet, the card battery is charged.
LINKS DESIGNATION POSITION
EJ600 Polarization of TNM alarm relay contact
Common GTR sce grounded 1Y - 2Y*
relay contact 2Y - 3Y
EJ810 Battery connected
Battery not connected 1Z - 2Z*
Battery connected 2Z - 3Z (ES)
* factory-set position
Table 3.47 - GIE-S Card Link and Switch Options
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-194
3.4.2.4 COB Card
This card exists in several hardware versions carte (AM100025 or AM102079 or 251836914).
The COB Card supports no link and switch options.
Fuse: F1 = 4 A.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-195
3.4.2.5 COB-B Card
The COB-B card with a 251 836 922 reference offers in relation to the COB card an additional
"CONFERENCE" function. This function can be inhibited by only moving link.
LINK DESIGNATION POSITION
TB2000 Inhibition or activation of the "CONFERENCE"
Function.
"CONFERENCE" Function inhibited 1 - 2 (INH)*
"CONFERENCE" Function Activated 2 - 3 (VAL)
* factory-set position
Table 3.48 - COB-B card link option
In the same shelf (FMX12 or FMX9-S), if two COB-B cards with a 251836922
reference are used, links of two cards must be imperatively in the same
position.
In the same shelf (FMX12 or FMX9-S shelves), if a COB-B and a COB card
are used, link assigned to validation or inhibition of the COB-B card
"CONFERENCE function must be imperatively in the "1 - 2" position (INH) -
"CONFERENCE" Fonction inhibited.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-196
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CONVERTER CARD
GIE-S CARD
UNASSIGNED SLOTS (CHOICE) :
- 2MU,
- A2S,
- V24/V11,
- V24/V28,
- 4VAS,
- BBTxRx,
- 6PAFC,
- Subscr,
- Exchan,
- Exch12,
- 3 64 I,
- 2w2B1Q,
- 4U TRANSFIX
- CONF,
- IADB,
- ETH.
.
COB CARD
(COB1)
PROTECTION COB CARD
(COB2)
FMX12 shelf
Figure 3.130 - Card Layout in the FMX12 Shelf
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-197
01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
03
04
05
06
CONVERTER CARD
GIE-S CARD
UNASSIGNED SLOTS (CHOICE) :
- 2MU,
- A2S,
- V24/V11,
- V24/V28,
- 4VAS,
- BBTxRx,
- 6PAFC,
- Subscr,
- Exchan,
- Exch12,
- 3 64 I,
- 2w2B1Q,
- 4U TRANSFIX
- CONF,
- IADB,
- ETH.
.
COB CARD (COB1)
PROTECTION COB CARD
(COB2)
FMX9-S shelf
-48V Battery Converter
GIE-S CARD
COB CARD
UNASSIGNED
SLOTS
FMX4 SHELF
(preferably
A2S)
SDSL CARD
Figure 3.131 - Card Layout in the FMX9-S and FMX4 Shelves
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-198
3.4.3 Setting Up the Cards
Power converters
The P3 converters are inserted in slots 01 and 02 of the FMX12 or FMX9-S shelves. The
shelf (FMX12 or FMX9-S) can be equipped with a converter located in any one of the two
slots in an unprotected version or with two identical converters in a protected version.
The -48 battery converter is inserted in the slot reserved for the power supply in the FMX4
shelves.
The converter cards should be checked according to the procedure in 3.4.1.
Other cards
Before inserting the cards, it should be checked that their hardware configuration
corresponds to the chosen operating mode. The port cards V24/V28, 4VAS, V24/V11,
Exchan, Subscr, Exch12, 4U TRANSFIX, 2w2B1Q, 6PAFC, A2ME, A2S, 364 I, CONF and
BBTxRx should be configured using the CT (or remote management system) following
insertion.
NOTE 1: If the GIE-S card has been stored, the battery must be reconnected, since
this is necessary for the saving of data. Cards leave the factory with a new
battery.
NOTE 3: After inserting a first COB (or COB-B) card, the shelf must be reset by
turning the converters off/on.
Slot numbering is provided in . The cards are distributed from left to right as follows:
- slot 01 (or reserved) P3 converter (FMX12 or FMX9-S), -48V battery converter
(FMX4) shelf),
- slot 02 redundant P3 converter (FMX12 or FMX9-S),
- slots 03 to 14 (FMX12)
- slots 06 to 14 (FMX9-S)
- slots 03 to 06 (FMX4)
general purpose slots reserved for channel cards
declared present or not depending on configuration
(see Figure 3.130 and Figure 3.131) ; the FMX4 shelf has
only four general purpose slots (03 to 06),
- alvoles 03 et 04 (FMX9-S) slots reserved for SHDSL cards in the FMX9-S shelf,
- slot 15 Management and Auxiliary Interface card (GIE-S),
- slot 16 (or reserved) Connections, timing circuit and Synchronization card
(COB1),
- slot 17(or reserved) COB protection card (COB2) (FMX12 or FMX9-S shelves
only).
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-199
3.4.4 External Connections
After inserting the cards in the shelf, the operator performs the connection of the different
signals and depending on the type of port cards present in the shelf and according to the type of
shelf used (refer to sub-section 3.1 "Front Connection Shelf (FMX12 shelf) Installation)" or
3.2 "Front Connection Shelf (FMX9-S shelf) Installation or in 3.3 "Rear connection shelf
installation (FMX4 shelf))".
3.4.5 Card Power-up
Before power-up, check the presence and status of card fuses, particularly on the
common equipment unit cards and those equipped with fuse-holders.
On power-up, certain ports go through a selftest phase. Their microprocessor initiates the
different card units, reads the configuration (factory-set configuration by default), lights the
various LEDs on the front panel and initiates the selftest. If no fault is detected during the
selftest, the card configuration (type of card) is applied by the GIE-S card.
The chaining of the various initialization phases is specific to each type of card and is specified
in the related sub-section in Volume 2.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-200
3.4.6 Operation
3.4.6.1 Introduction
The FMX is centrally managed by an operating system which may be:
- a Craft Terminal (CT),
- or a remote management system (RMS).
These two operating system may be connected to the equipment simultaneously, locally or
remotely.
The operation of the FMX includes remote equipment connected to it (low, medium and high bit
rate or dual-interface units).
Interfacing with the operating system may be:
- a V24/V28 interface,
- an EOC channel transmitted in a 8 bps path,
- a 64 kbps EOC channel carried by one of any of TSs in a 2 Mbps aggregate or tributary port,
- or GIE-S card P1 and P2 management interfaces via others SAGEM equipments.
On power-up, the slots are considered free. Any card plugged into a free slot is immediately
detected by the common equipment units, subject to its time in the slot being greater than 2
seconds. The slot is then considered not empty. The common equipment units recognize each
card type.
This is the physical composition, it is automatically applied by the FMX.
Using the CT or RMS, the operator can create a logical configuration, that is determine a set of
configuration data necessary to operate the equipment: define general system parameters,
physical description and associated parameters (cards, ports), connections and their
characteristics, alarm allocation etc.
On first initialization, the equipment system data (also called general parameters) are
determined by default; they can be changed at any time by operator: synchronization, mode of
operation etc.
Data saving is provided by a battery which allows all the information to be preserved for over 48
hours in the event of a power failure.
To use a FMX, the operator must determine the logical configuration, that is:
- general parameters (synchronization data, equipment behavior etc.),
- physical description (shelf, cards and ports) and associated parameters (fault severity,
monitoring status, loopbacks, performance etc.,
- connection description.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-201
3.4.6.2 Operating System
A) Craft Terminal (CT)
General
Local operation (possibly remoted via modem) of the equipment is performed via a PC type
computer connected on the V.24/V.28 F interface of the GIE-S card front panel (either the
shelf connection panel or shelf rear panel depending on the type of shelf used).
The local connection allows the operation of:
- the FMX to which it is connected, either via modem,
- other FMX or DCE DCM belonging to the management network (a list of accessible
equipment is displayed) via a frame relay connection set up between the different units or
P1/P2 links.
Operating Session
Access to the CT operating session may be password-protected.
It is single user type session.
A FMX, operated in a remote session via the EOC network on a CT cannot be operated in a
local session and vice versa.
A priority is nevertheless granted to the local user. If a remote user has obtained rights on
the CT and controls the operating session, the remote user may be disconnected following a
request by the local user (the converse is not true).
Password
By default, the access control function is inactive, access to all MMR functions is unrestricted
except the "reset" function.
The "Password" function allows passwords for three user classes corresponding to a service
category and controlling access to the MMI functions to be defined.
CT Functions
Refer to software Users Manual No. 252938382-x where x represents the issue number.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-202
B) Remote Management System (RMS)
General
The Remote Management System (RMS) is connected on the Ethernet interface of the GIE-
S card (connector of the connection panel or rear panel depending on the type of shelf
used).
The connection port is 10/100BT Ethernet type. By configuration, the user can sets the rate
(10 or 100 MHz), the mode (half or full duplex), the type of cable (straight or crossed) or
authorize the rate negotiation.
The connection allows the operation:
- of the FMX to which the RMS is connected,
- of other FMX or DCE DCM type equipment belonging to the management network (a list of
accessible equipment is displayed) via the frame relay connection set up between the
different equipment units or P1/P2 links.
Operating Session and RMS Functions
All the equipment parameters which can be modified on the CT can also be modified via the
RMS.
NOTE: the "reset" function is not accessible via the RMS.
Refer to the IONOS network management system Users Handbook No. 56814480-XX
where XX indicates is the version an issue number.
C) Cohabitation of Modes of Operation
The FMX may operate according to the following two modes of operation:
- the "connected" mode (operation via the RMS),
- and the independent mode (operation via the CT).
By default, the FMX mode of operation is the independent mode.
The independent mode is used:
- for installation,
- local maintenance,
- when the management relation with the RMS is not set up,
- or when there is no RMS.
In the last two cases, the FMX is not administratively connected.
This mode of operation is used as long as the equipment is not connected administratively.
The FMX supervises the RGT interface to detect a possible connection request and no
interaction is undertaken between the CT interface and the RGT interface.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-203
In the "connected" mode of operation:
- management communication between the FMX and the RMS is operational,
- the FMX is operation,
- and the network element [(entity (FMX and remote equipment) managed by the RMS] is,
administratively, connected to the RMS (action performed on the RMS),
- the FMX network element (FMX-NE) reports any functional configuration change to the
RMS.
NOTE: In this mode of operation, operation may also be performed on the CT, the
principle being as follows:
- when the operator opens a local operation session on the CT, the FMX
requests authorization from the RMS; during the local operation phase, the
FMX informs the RMS of any functional configuration change via the continuous
function and the RMS makes no modification on the equipment,
- when the local operator disconnects, the FMX informs the RMS.
The FMX memorizes functional configuration changes made on the CT or RMS in the events
memory.
When communication between the RMS and the equipment is cut off, the content of this
memory is available for the RMS for consistency purposes.
The events memory includes continuous recordings of all events occurring in the system and
which must be reported to the RMS:
- local connection/disconnection to/from operation requests (connection to F interface),
- configuration changes,
- fault indications (occurrence, disappearance),
- exceeded performance threshold indications or return to normal status,
- loopback indications.
The structure of the information blocks is equivalent to that of the notification messages sent
continuously. This memory is circular. It may be read or reset by the operator. Its maximum
storage capacity is 800 events.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-204
3.4.6.3 CT Operating Software Implementation
The procedure for implementing the operating software (CT) is described in User Manual No.
252938382-x where x represents the issue number.
3.4.6.4 RMS Operating Software Implementation
The procedure for implementing the operating software (RMS) is described in the IONOS
Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480-XX where XX indicates is the
version and issue number.
3.4.6.5 Configuration by Default
On power-up, the FMX is configured by default as follows:
- multiplexed connection function,
- unused TS code:
. SIG = 1101 and Data = AIS (all 1),
- synchronization source:
. nominal = free oscillation,
. mode = manual,
- no password,
- unmasked alarms at each slot and each port (for multiple port card),
- absent card code (see glossary):
. SIG = 1111 and Data = AIS,
- idle code for connections declared deactivated (see glossary):
. SIG = 1101 and Data = AIS,
- performance thresholds (see 4.5.4): 2 Mbps path:
. ES (Errored seconds) = 96 (15 min) and 128 (24 h),
. SES (Severely Errored Seconds) = 4 (15 min) and 4 (24 h),
- Sb Mux mode of operation,
- non-gateway FMX,
- FMX12 Shelf.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-205
3.4.6.6 Start-up Test
The start-up test is performed by the software when the shelf is put into service, or after the
restart functions are activated.
The software analyzes the validity of configuration data respectively contained on the GIE-S
card (backup memory) and on the COB card (standby memory) to select the data to preserve.
"OK": configuration exists.
"NOK": no configuration defined.
GIE-S CARD COB CARD ACTIONS
OK
OK
NOK
NOK
OK
NOK
OK
NOK
Transfer COB configuration COB to GIE-S
Transfer GIE configuration GIE-S to COB
Transfer COB configuration COB to GIE-S
automatic INITIALIZATION
the operator must take up programming again
Table 3.49 - Start-up Test
3 - PARTICULAR OPERATING FUNCTIONS
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-206
3.5 Particular Operating Functions
This paragraph describes certain particular operating functions accessible in use. It specifies
their impact on general equipment operation.
These functions are the following:
- connection function,
- synchronization,
- codes to be inserted in the TSs,
- performance parameters,
- error and fault management,
- environment loop processing,
- events memory,
- CT operating interface.
3.5.1 Connection Function
The connection function is defined for each card or port (depending on type of card). It may be
multiplexed or cross-connected.
Two tributaries or two multiplexes may be linked if they have a multiplexed connection function.
If the source termination is a multiplex with a multiplexed connection function, the destination
termination must be a tributary with the multiplexed connection function or must have a cross-
connected connection function.
The table below summarizes the different possible cases.
CONNECTION
TRIBUTARY PORT AGGREGATE PORT
FUNCTION POSSIBLE Multiplexed connection
function
Multiplexed connection
function
TRIBUTARY PORT TRIBUTARY PORT
function or cross-connect
connection function
Cross-connect connection
function
AGGREGATE PORT AGGREGATE PORT
function or cross-connect
connection function
Cross-connect connection
function
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-207
B
A B A
A
C
D
D
A C
B
F
B
B A
D
A
D
B
C
C
E
E
C
C
F
Tributary
ports
MULTIPLEXING
2 Mbit/s
G.703
Unavailable configuration
Unassigned
ports
Unassigned
ports
Aggregate
2 Mbit/s
G.703
function
function
function
function
function
function
Aggregate
Figure 3.132 - Connection Function
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-208
The selection and distribution of the cards are exclusively determined by operator need and
shelf wiring.
Figure 3.132 shows the connection function (multiplex and cross-connect).
3.5.2 Synchronization
3.5.2.1 Synchronization Sources
The FMX may be synchronized on one of the following 14 timing clocks:
- one of the 12 2.048 MHz timing clocks from the tributary or multiplex card slots of the shelf in
which the following cards are inserted:
a 2-2w2B1Q port card (timing clock recovered from a port in the U network mode),
a 2MU card,
or a A2S card.
NOTE: the A2S card which manages up to 4 PCM streams, at a given time only delivers
one of the 4 receive timing clocks. The port selected as the synchronization timing
clock must be "activated".
- the external synchronization interface, matched at 120 complying with ITU-T
recommendation G.703,
- the internal clock possibly replaced by a TCXO (depending on the COB card installed).
The active synchronization source is the clock from which, at a given moment, the COB card
supplies all the necessary frequencies to the rest of the equipment.
The equipment is designed to operation with a nominal synchronization source and at most two
standby sources ranked in decreasing order of priority. Free oscillation cannot be backed up.
Selections are modifiable by the operator on the CT or RMS.
3.5.2.2 Synchronization Mode
In the event of synchronization source loss (nominal or standby), switching is performed
automatically onto the lower priority source until the free oscillation defined as the least priority
source, but always available, is attained.
The synchronization mode is the mode of return to the hierarchically higher source; two modes
are available (on the CT):
- automatic timeout mode,
- manual mode.
Automatic Timeout Mode
If the equipment is synchronized on a source S
i
, the equipment synchronize itself on a higher
priority source when the latter has become correct at the end of a T1 (3 s) time period.
If the equipment is synchronized on S
i
and S
i
goes into fault mode, the equipment tries to
synchronizer itself on the lower priority source.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-209
Manual Mode
i
, only the operator may request the return to higher
priority source (from the CT or RMS).
i
and S
i
goes into the fault mode, the equipment tries to
synchronize itself on the lower priority source.
3.5.2.3 Synchronization Setting
Whatever the synchronization mode, at any time the operator can set the synchronization on
any one of the possible sources or impose the internal clock (from the CT or RMS).
IMPORTANT: Faults which may occur in this status are not detected by the software, no
alarm is generated, no switching may take place. Nevertheless, on fault
detection on the set source (other than the internal clock) the equipment
switches to the internal clock but no alarm is generated. The equipment
returns under the control of the set source with not timeout when the fault
disappears.
The operator may cancel this control order with the return to nominal synchronization function
(on the CT), the synchronization management controller is automatically reinitiated in the mode
preceding the setting and on the previously designated nominal source.
This return to synchronization function allows the operator to return to the synchronization
source with the highest priority, in the manual mode.
3.5.3 Codes to be Inserted in the TSs
To avoid transmission errors, codes are inserted by the common equipment units in the unused
data TSs and Signaling half TSs: TSs not allocated to a link, connection deactivated etc..
These codes may be modified by the operator, per card, per port (depending on card type) or
per connection.
TSs not allocated to a link (or non-existent connection)
- Data: code of unused TSs associated with card or port
8 bits selected among 2 possible configurations
- Signaling: code of unused TSs associated with card or port
4 bits selected among 8 possible configuration
TSs allocated to a connection declared deactivated
- Data: code of unused TSs associated with card or port
- Signaling: code of unused TSs associated with card or port
4 bits selected among 8 possible configuration
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-210
TSs associated with an absent card
- Data: AIS: (11111111)
- Signaling: absent card code associated with connection
3.5.4 Performance Management
Operation performance management essentially consists in running a statistical analysis of
transmission performance offered by a transmission resource such as a path or digital section,
using indicators built on the number of transmission errors detected.
Performance management also performs the following functions:
- transmission error detection,
- basic indicator generation, that is:
number of Errored Seconds (ES),
number of Severely Errored Seconds (SES),
number of background block errors (BBE),
- transmission performance generation (TXP),
- transmission of spontaneous messages to the CT and/or RMS with possible exceeded
threshold notification,
- storage of information in the memories for statistical purposes.
Parameters
Performance management is established for paths generating the CRC4 procedure.
Basic indicators are generated each second based on the number of transmission errors
detected in the second.
The parameters applied are the following:
- ES: Errored Second
An ES is a second including at least one transmission error or one fault affecting transmission.
- SES: Severely Errored Second
An SES is a second including a number of transmission errors greater than a threshold which
typically corresponds to an error rate of 10
-3
or one fault affecting transmission.
- BBE: Background Block Errors
A BBE corresponds the accumulated number of errored blocks outside an SES.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-211
- UAP: Unavailability Period (number of seconds of unavailability)
An unavailability period begins when 10 consecutive SES have been detected and ends after
10 seconds with no SES (these 10 seconds are not part of the unavailability period).
When the path is in unavailability status, ES, SES, and BBE counting is stopped and a fault is
generated if the port is not masked.
Transmission Performance Generation
Transmission performance is determined via the consolidation of basic indicators.
It may take on one of the following three values:
- Normal Transmission Performance (NTP),
- Degraded Transmission Performance (DTP),
- Intolerable Transmission Performance (ITP).
Transmission performance is determined by counting the number of ES, SES and BBE over
non-sliding fixed periods (T1 = 15 minutes to calculate ITP and T2 = 24 hours to calculate DTP)
and comparing the ES and SES counters to fixed thresholds.
These counters are the following:
- counter C1 of ES to determine ITP over T1,
- counter C2 of SES to determine ITP over T1,
- counter C3 of ES to determine DTP over T2,
- counter C4 of SES to determine DTP over T2.
At the end of T1 (respectively T2), counters C1 and C2 (respectively C3 and C4) are reset.
Passage from NTP to DTP or from NTP or DTP to ITP occurs as soon as counting thresholds
are exceeded. On the other hand, a return from DTP to NTP or from ITP to DTP or NTP only
occurs at the end of the counting periods (T1 for ITP and T2 for DTP).
ITP is declared if during a period T1, one of the counters (C1 or C2) exceeds threshold Si.
The measurement is performed with not hysteresis. Exit from ITP is declared if at the end of a
period T1 posterior to a ITP period: C1 < S1 et C2 < S2.
DTP is declared if ITP status has not already been reached and if during a period T2, one of the
counters (C3 or C4) exceeds a threshold Si.
Exit from DTP is declared at the end of a period T2.
NTP is declared if DTP or ITP status have not already been reached.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-212
Performance status (TXP) may be queried by the operator for any path termination (in the
transmission and reception directions).
NOTE: Values Si are fixed and global to the system:
- S1 = 96, S2 = 4, S3 = 128 et S4 = 4.
Error Determination Parameters
Error determination parameters define the thresholds for the number of errors or errored blocks
per second defining an SES.
The values of the error determination parameters are those recommended by ITU-T
recommendation M.2100. These values are defined in the table below.
Interface Error(s) detected per second
RECEPTION
DIRECTION
TRANSMISSION
DIRECTION
ES SES ES SES
1 FAL* YES YES
1 Sig Fail at 2 Mbps YES YES
2048 kbps 1 CRC4 reception error YES NO
(with N1 (N1 = 805) CRC4 reception errors YES YES
CRC4 1 CRC4 transmission error YES NO
processing N2 (N2 = 805) CRC4 transmission
errors
YES YES
1 RAL** YES NO
e (e = 128) RAL YES YES
* FAL : Frame Alignment Loss
** RAL : Remote Alarm Indication
Transmission Performance Parameters
Values Si are fixed and global to the system:
- S1 = 96, S2 = 4, S3 = 128, S4 = 4 (measurement performed without hysteresis).
Notifications
Exceeded thresholds are notified for each path termination, independently for each
transmission direction, if the port is unmasked.
The notification contains the following information:
- path termination identification (on 23 characters),
- transmission or reception direction,
- date and time,
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-213
- measurement period (15 minutes or 24 hours),
- reason exceeded (ES and SES).
These notifications are also recorded continuously in an event memory.
Performance Memories
Performance Register Memories
The information resulting from the transmission performance calculations are stored in
performance register in cumulated form over fixed time periods (15 minutes or 24 hours) for all
paths. This register is associated, on an individual basis, with each path termination.
At the end of each period:
- the content of the register is spontaneously transferred to the CT if the path is monitored,
- the register is reset (cumulative counts reset),
- a new measurement period begins.
The performance register contains the following information:
- path termination identification,
- period start date,
- period duration,
- effective measurement time,
- number of ES,
- number of SES,
- number of BBE,
- and the number of unavailability periods.
This memory has a capacity of 1000 blocks for all the paths. It is managed in a circular manner
and may be queried by the operator.
Unavailability Register Memories
The memory of the unavailability registers has a capacity of 500 blocks for all the paths.
The unavailability register contains the following information:
- path termination identification,
- unavailability period start date (to the second),
- end of unavailability date (to the second).
This memory is managed in a circular manner and may be queried by the operator.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-214
3.5.5 Error and Fault Management
Error and Fault Management performs the following functions:
- elementary fault detection,
- fault indication (FI) generation,
- spontaneous message transmission to CT and/or RMS,
- information storage in events memory,
- local alarm generation,
- local alarm control access means generation.
Fault Detection
The faults and errors are either detected by the common equipment units or transmitted by the
port cards.
These faults may have the following different origins:
- fault states detected on the equipment (Signal fail, FAL, AIS, converter fault etc),
- transmission error counting,
- configuration error detection.
Actions consequential to fault detection, taken by the common equipment units, may be the
following:
- lighting (extinguishing) of LEDs on the GIE-S card front panel,
- notification of fault and error messages to auxiliary interfaces,
- activation of central office alarms,
- constitution of an events memory.
Fault Indication (FI) Generation
Fault Indications (FI) are attributes of objects seen by the CT.
The FIs are generated on the basis of faults or errors detected by filtering and (or) combination.
The purpose of the filtering operation, internal to the equipment, performed on the basis of time
criterion (confirmation time on occurrence), is to confirm the fault.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-215
FI Confirmation
The confirmation of the occurrence of a FI is performed on a timeout.
The following parameters are attributed to each FI:
- FI local severity (major, minor or no alarm) which determines the contribution to the alarm
type,
- an occurrence timeout (Ta) which allows the FI to be confirmed if the elementary fault lasts
longer than Ta.
NOTE: the Ta occurrence timeout only exists for port type FIs.
The FI local severity and Ta occurrence timeout parameters may be modified by the operator
(CT). Ta is worth 0 or 1 seconds and its default value varies according to the entity.
FI status changes (occurrence an (or) disappearance) are notified to the CT if it is connected.
Local Alarms
The FMX generates local alarms (major and/or minor) based on the different equipment FIs.
The major alarm (respectively minor) is activated as soon as a FI with major severity
(respectively minor) is confirmed on an object.
Control Access Means
Present Alarms Cause Display
An MMI control order allows the operator to display the causes(s) of the alarms present at the
common equipment level.
NOTE: When the cause of the alarms present is inherent to the position of the
"Normal/fault keys located on the front panel of the GIE-S card, there is no alarm.
Fault Severity Display
An MMI control order allows the operator to display or modify the severity of each fault for
each entity managed.
Fault and Error Description
The faults and errors are broken down into different classes:
- card or port level fault and error,
- equipment level fault and error,
- faults and errors associated with the synchronization functions,
- faults and errors associated with the operation functions (auxiliary interfaces etc.).
NOTE: Faults relative to equipment are not maskable.
Port level faults and errors depend on card type. These faults and errors may be
masked (un-monitored status) at the port or globally at the card level. Virtual interface
level faults and errors may be masked at the global level (2 Mbps port) or at the
connection level.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-216
3.5.6 Environment Loop Processing
The environment entities are managed via the remote monitoring and remote control interfaces
available in loop form.
A remote monitoring signal is an all or nothing device characterized by a status bit which
indicates the presence or absence of an environment status or connected equipment. Three
remote monitoring interfaces may be associated with a determined entity (the remote
monitoring is processed like a fault for this entity).
A remote control can be used to control an environment entity (door opening). The remote
controls, two in number, are the maintained type (each one is activated or deactivated by
loading a status value).
Environment Object Implementation
By default, the remote monitoring and remote control interfaces are inactivated. They may only
be activated after the associated environment objects have been enabled.
The operator may enable an environment object by indicating:
- its name ( 8 characters),
- for each remote control, interface no. initial status value associated (open or closed),
activation mode and associated criteria,
- and for each remote monitoring signal, interface no., fault identification and status value
associated and fault characteristics (severity, time delay).
Application in Operation
Once the object has been enabled, each remote monitoring signal is regularly scanned. The
changes in status value are processed depending on the case, such as an FI occurrence or
disappearance, in accordance with general fault processing.
Each remote control declared in the manual mode may then be activated or deactivated by the
operator.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-217
3.5.7 Events Memory
The events memory includes continuous recordings of all events occurring in the system and
which must be notified to the CT, that is:
- local operation connection and disconnection requests (connection to F interface),
- fault indications (occurrence or disappearance),
- exceeded performance threshold indications or return to normal status,
- loopback indications.
The structure of the information blocks is equivalent to notification messages sent continuously.
The events memory (maximum capacity = 800 events), of the circular type, may be read and
reset by the operator.
3.5.8 CT Interface
The FMX detects the connection and disconnection of the CT on the local auxiliary interface
and verifies that no other session is in progress.
The local session corresponds to the time during which the operator can transmit control orders
to the FMX. The local session is automatically closed in the event of the following:
- CT disconnection,
- via the "Reset" and "Restart" functions or when the GIE-S card is removed from the shelf.
3 - EVOLUTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-218
3.6 Evolution
This sub-section concerns the evolution of the physical configuration in operation. Equipment
characteristics are accessible via the CT (or RMS).
3.6.1 Adding a Port Card
The FMX allows new cards to be added to the physical configuration without altering operation
in progress.
The procedure proposed is the following:
- plug the card in the free or previously freed slot.
1) If the slot is not allocated:
No card has been described for this location by the operator using the CT
If the card is correctly recognized:
- the card is applied in the physical configuration. The operator may query its characteristics
(software version and type) using the CT.
The operator may then declare the card, assign is fault and alarm parameters, create
connections. By default the card is unmasked as well as its ports.
2) If the slot was already allocated:
The FMX analyzes the information of this new card and compares it to that of the card
declared in this location in the physical description.
Two cases are possible:
a) the new card is different from the previous card in terms of type. The different card fault is
generated.
If the operator really wants this new card, the physical description must be modified. The
previous card must be deleted which deletes the connections and the different card
fault. The new can may then be described by the operator.
b) the new card and the previous one are of the same type. The FMX reprograms the new
card with the parameters of the former cad. The card absent fault disappears. Service is
restored.
Note: Replacing an identical card may be performed without the CT.
3 - EVOLUTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-219
3.6.2 Modification of a Port Card without Removing it from the
Shelf
The operator may modify the port cards via the CT. After modification validation, it is applied in
the physical configuration. The connections can be deleted in certain cases. The operator will
have been notified locally via the CT.
3.6.3 Port Card Removal
When a port card is definitively removed, the operator switches a slot from occupied status to
free status; the procedure proposed is the following:
- delete the card on the CT, this choice must be confirmed,
- remove the card from the shelf.
NOTE: The function deletes the memorization of the card in the slot and all the
connections transiting through this slot, no message informs the operator if
connections transiting through this slot exist or not.
3.6.4 GIE-S Card Downloading
To be continue.
3 - EVOLUTION
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 3-220
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-1
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-2
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-3
4.1 Preventive Maintenance
The only preventive maintenance operation applicable to the FMX Digital Cross-connect
System is the replacement of the GIE or GIE P or GIE-S or IADB Card battery.
It is recommended to replace it every six years.
WARNING
If the battery is incorrectly replaced there is a risk of explosion.
Only replace with same type battery or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according tomanufacturer instructions.
Battery Replacement Procedure
Remove the GIE, GIE-P, GIE-S or IADB card; when GIE, GIE-P or GIE-S is removed the FMX
operates in the protected mode.
Unsolder the battery (GIE card) or remove the battery (GIE-P, GIE-S or IADB Card) and replace
with a new identical battery:
- 2.5 V - 40 mA/h Cadmium Nickel battery for GIE card,
- CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 270 mA/h Lithium battery for GIE-P or GIE-S cards,
- CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 500 mA/h Lithium battery for IADB card,
Replace the GIE, GIE-P, GIE-S or IADB Card back in position.
When GIE, GIE-P or GIE-S is replaced FMX runs start-up tests (see Sub-section 3.4.6.6).
When IADB card is replaced in the shelf, realize the starting-up of the card (see Volume 2
Chapter 14).
Enter date and time.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-4
4.2 Corrective Maintenance
4.2.1 Principle
The procedures below permit the logic analysis of failures and suggest solutions to restoring
service at the shortest possible notice. They apply only to corrective maintenance consisting of
card replacement in the field.
Fault and Error Detection
Faults and errors are either detected by the Common Equipment Units, or transmitted by
equipment port cards. These faults may have the following different origins:
- faults states detected on the equipment such as "SigFail", "FAL", "AIS", "Conver",...
- transmission error counting,
- configuration error detection.
Possible consequential actions are:
- central office alarm activation,
- fault and error message notification to auxiliary interfaces,
- lighting or extinguishing of one or more LED(s) on the card front panels,
- constitution of events memory.
NOTE: This section deals with overall equipment maintenance only. For alarms detected on a
particular port, refer to the volume 2 section dealing with the equipment card
corresponding to that port.
Fault Indication (FI) Generation
Fault Indications (FI) are attributes of objects detected by the CT or RMS (several FIs may be
assigned to one object).
The FIs are generated on the basis of faults or errors detected through filtering.
The purpose of the filtering, based on a time criterion (confirmation time on fault occurrence) is
to confirm the fault.
FI Confirmation
The confirmation of an FI occurrence is performed on a timeout.
The following parameters which may be modified by the operator (CT or RMS) are assigned to
each FI:
- local severity (major, minor, no alarm),
- occurrence timeout (0 or 1 second) (FI confirmed if and only if the fault lasts longer than the
occurrence timeout).
FI status changes (occurrence and disappearance) are notified to the CT if it is connected to the
equipment and to the RMS.
NOTE: The occurrence of slot type FIs disables the disappearance of FIs linked to the card
allocated to this slot.
The equipment generates major and minor alarms on the basis of the different equipment FIs
(the major alarm, respectively minor, is activated as soon as a major severity, respectively
minor, FI is confirmed on an object).
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-5
4.2.2 Maintenance Facilities
The operator may use the following sources of information for easier fault locating:
- card front panel LEDs and controls (test sockets, etc.) listed below,
- auxiliary functions enabling the operator to list equipment configuration information and read
alarm status,
- alarm monitoring facilities including the display of notifications on the CT or RMS.
- maintenance functions,
- loopback facilities (both manual and remote-controlled), available on the various port cards, as
described in Volume 2 for each particular card.
4.2.2.1 Front Panel LEDs and Controls
FMX card front panels support LEDs providing visual presentation of card alarms, control
switches and test sockets.
P3 Power Converter
Red "Fail" LED Voltage failure at card output,
"On/Off" Switch System Power-up/Down
Four test points: "+5V/0V", "-5V/0V"
"+53V/0V" and "-53V/0V"
Measurement access,
-48V battery Power Converter
Red "Fail" LED Voltage failure at card output,
"On/Off" Switch System Power-up/Down
GIE-S Card
Red "Mj Alm" LED Major alarm
"Norm/Fail" switch Major alarm acknowledgment switch
Red "Mn Alm" LED Minor alarm
"Norm/Fail" switch Major alarm acknowledgment switch
Yellow ETH "Col" LED Ethernet, collision indicator,
green ETH "Rx" LED Ethernet, activity indicator,
"Debug" RJ45 connector Use reserved,
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-6
"Modem/Loc Switch Validation of an CT interface; DCE type CT
interface for FMX local management (Loc)
(interface on card front panel) or DTE type
interface for FMX management via a modem
(Modem) (connection panel or front panel of
GIE-S adapter card depending on shelf used),
RJ45 connector Connection to Craft Terminal (CT) locally.
COB Card
Green Es/Svs In" LED indication of operational status of COB card:
- LED lit COB operational,
- LED unlit COB not operational,
Green Actif/Actv LED indication of COB card status (active or standby):
- LED lit COB active,
- LED unlit COB on standby,
Yellow "Sync/Sync" LEDs active synchronization element:
. "Nom/Nom" - LED lit nominal source,
. "Repli/Stdby" - LED lit standby source,
. "Int/Int" - LED lit internal clock.
COB-B Card
Identical to the COB card, but in addition the two following LEDs dedicated to the
CONFERENCE function.
1 green "Actif/Actv" LED : indication of the CONFERENCE function activitity status
LED lit : CONFERENCE Function active on
the COB-B card
LED unlit : CONFERENCE Function idle on the
COB-B card
1 red "Def/Fail" LED : Default indication related to the CONFERENCE function
LED lit : Alarme Indication Signal (AIS) Fail
on a channel for the analog bridges
or
: Loss of V.110 Frame Alignment
(LFA) Fail on a channel for the low
rates digital bridges
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-7
4.2.2.2 Auxiliary Functions
Auxiliary functions provide the operator with access to the physical configuration identified by
the system, the active configuration parameters and where applicable the parameters relative to
a given card:
- Listing of general equipment parameters,
- Reading synchronization status including nominal synchronization source, standby source
and restoration mode selection.
- Listing port cards, whether or not fitted in the rack and accepted in the physical
configuration, and their parameters (mode of operation, bit rate, etc).
- Listing alarm assignments made during start-up for the various faults monitored by port
cards: major alarm, minor alarm, or null.
- Listing connections for each card slot.
- Reading alarm disable/enable status for each card or port to prevent alarms detected at card
or port level from being processed by common equipment units.
- Reading current alarms.
Furthermore, displaying the notifications transmitted by the equipment on the CT may provide
an operating history; the interpretation of the different messages available as well as the
explanation of the different operating functions are provided in the CT Users Manual CT
252938382-x (where x represent the edition number) network management system manual
N56914480-xx (where xx represents the edition number).
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-8
4.2.3 Fault or Error Locating
Preliminary remarks
The operator may display the cause or causes of the alarms that have occurred on common
equipment units with the exception of those that have occurred due to power supply failure or
incorrect setting of the switches.
Port card failure and error conditions may be assigned to major or minor alarms, or unassigned,
via the man-machine interface. In the following procedures, failure conditions are assumed to
initiate alarms assigned by default.
Before fault locating, display any currently applied loopbacks.
An incorrectly plugged unit or a fuse fault always causes a major alarm to be initiated and an
appropriate error message to be transmitted. This however does not apply to the GIE (or GIE P)
and COB (or COB-B) Cards.
The cause of a failure (on local or far-end equipment) may always be determined by a loopback
test procedure, but it requires interrupting the link in both directions of transmission. Upon
completion of loopback tests, set looping plugs or switches back to their initial positions.
Description of Faults and Errors
The faults and errors are broken down as follows:
- faults associated with the physical configuration (equipment level fault (non maskable faults),
card level fault (incompatibility between cards and shelf and/or slots) power supply fault,
- port level faults and errors depending on card type,
NOTE: These faults and errors may be masked (unmonitored condition) on the port or
globally for the card. Virtual Interface level faults and errors may be masked
globally (2 Mbps port) or at the level of each connection.
- faults and errors associated with multiplexing (connections) and synchronization functions,
- faults and errors associated with auxiliary functions (auxiliary interfaces etc.).
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-9
4.2.3.1 Major (or Minor) Alarm Troubleshooting
The major alarm, respectively minor alarm, is activated when the fault or error is detected by the
GIE (or GIE P) card.
The major alarm, respectively minor alarm, occurs in several forms:
- the red Maj Alm LED, respectively Min Alm LED located on the GIE (or GIE P) card front
panel lights,
- the major or minor alarm output(s*) respectively of the power supply filter or the -48V battery
power converter (depending on the shelf type used) is/are* service-grounded (central office
major and minor alarm respectively),
NOTE: The major and minor alarms are not remoted to the power supply connector of the
FMX4 (or MD COMPACT) shelves when they are equipped with 110/230V mains
supply.
- major or minor alarm information is available on the GTR interface, via relay contact or
service grounding***, on a connector of the connection panel of the GIE (or GIE P) adapter
card front panel or at the rear of the shelf (depending on type of shelf used).
* the number (1 or 2) of major or minor alarm outputs depends on the power supply filter
used.
** The nature of the circuit used (COB or open) depends on the position of the "Norm/Fail"
switch associated with the major alarm, respectively minor alarm.
*** The nature of the circuit used (COB or relay contact) is determined on installation by the
positioning of a link option on the GIE (or GIE P) card.
In the event of an alarm, the operator may disable the major (minor) alarm using the "Norm/Fail"
switch (Fail position) on the front panel of the GIE (or GIE P) card ; after the disappearance of
the fault, the central alarm and the LED remain active until the operator returns the switch to the
Norm position. Only the GTR alarm is independent of switch position.
Fault locating procedures are identical for major and minor alarms. Only the respective
conclusions they lead to are different.
The following procedure is suggested for analyzing the various possible causes of a major (or
minor) alarm. Alarms are classified according to their probability of occurrence and severity of
effects.
Maj Alm or Min Alm LEDs lit
1 - Check the settings of the GIE (or GIE P) Card front panel "Norm/Fail" switches. During
normal operation, they should be set in the "Norm" position.
---> In the event of a failure, refer to the beginning of Sub-section 4.2.3.1.
2 - the active synchronization source presented on the COB (or COB-B) Card front panel is
different from that selected by the operator.
---> In the event of an error, refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.2 on synchronization failures.
3 - A Power Converter Card front panel LED is lit.
---> Refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.3 dealing with power supply alarms.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-10
4 - Connect the CT to the system:
---> the operator fails to log on to the system:
refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.4 dealing with start-up.
---> log on is completed successfully:
. analyze the various items of auxiliary information,
. list alarms,
. refer to Sub-sections 4.2.3.5 and 4.2.3.6 dealing with alarm analysis for common
equipment units and port cards, respectively.
. refer to the volume 2 section describing port cards to analyze alarms for such
cards.
4.2.3.2 Synchronization Failure
Timing circuit faults and errors are synchronization losses detected by the COB (or COB-B)
card on the different synchronization sources.
Synchronization source fault criteria are the following:
- the presence for one second of an AIS in the datastream of the 2Mbps active source,
- line signal fail,
- card absence, card fuse fault or watchdog fault,
- U interface deactivation.
The source availability criterion is the disappearance of all the faults.
The fault criteria of the external synchronization source is the absence of transitions for a period
of four time bits (16 s).
The criterion for the detection of a 2048 kHz clock signal fail is the absence of transitions on this
clock for a period of 4 time bits (about 2 s).
Synchronization is made using a PLL. Lock-off is guaranteed beyond 160 ppm. Lock-off (DSG)
is only processed by the software in manual mode.
Actions consequential to the detection of a synchronization fault on the nominal or standby
source are :
- switch onto standby source,
- FI generation,
- active source change notification.
Two types of FI may be generated:
- general fault (when there is no operational nominal or standby synchronization source
allowing operation in the mode selected by the operator),
- switching fault (if synchronization sources are still available).
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-11
Failure of FMX synchronization may be due to one of the following causes:
- a physical configuration problem: the operator must check source validity,
- actual synchronization failure.
Perform the following operations for easier fault locating:
- list the information linked to the synchronization function to know the sources and
synchronization mode selected,
- list the faults present on the equipment.
The nominal synchronization source is the clock extracted from a card
interface
In this case, check that the source is correct:
- 2 Mbps Card or 2w2B1Q Card fitted in the slot correctly described, that is, no (C Out) failure
condition is displayed by the system.
- Error-free 2 Mbps signal detected at the Card interface and failure to detect any FAL or AIS
alarm on the Card (front panel LEDs unlit, or no failure contained in the list printed).
Synchronization failure
Synchronization loss is the physical inability of the COB (or COB-B) card to synchronize itself
on the specified signals (absence of excessive signal slip); the equipment then synchronizes
itself on its internal clock (OL) when no other source is available. The "General failure" alarm
causes:
- the system to switch to freely-oscillating mode, whereas the COB (or COB-B) Card front
panel LED corresponding to the nominal synchronization source remains lit,
- a alarm to be generated and a GTR alarm to be transmitted,
- timeslot 0 non-frame alignment bit 5 to be set on 2 Mbps Cards operating in TRANSMIC 2G
aggregate mode, after a time delay of 500 ms.
Processing a synchronization alarm
1- The external synchronization source is displayed via the COB (or COB-B) Card front panel:
- check for signal detection and correct frequency,
- in the event of a failure, replace the cable and/or the external synchronization source.
2 - The source displayed on the COB (or COB-B) card is recovered from one of the card ports,
- check for signal detection,
- apply loopback,
---> if synchronization is restored, check for correct link frequency,
---> upon failure to restore synchronization, replace the 2 Mbps Card.
3 - If none of the above operations has cleared the alarm, switch power off to FMX, replace
the COB (or COB-B) Card, then switch power on again.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-12
4.2.3.3 Power Supply Failure
P3 Power Converter
A 5V output voltage failure on a Power Converter Card means that the various equipment
circuits are no longer powered by the Card, either due to a defective card or to a card fitted, but
switched off.
This condition causes the corresponding Power Converter Card "Fail" LED to light up.
The common equipment units allow the condition of the converter(s) to be monitored. Certain
conditions correspond to faults.
NOTE: The consequential actions are only executed if the - 48 V Signaling is available (the
three indicators, "Fail", "Maj Alm" and "Min Alm", are the only ones powered with the
-48 V Sig voltage).
CONVERTER A
CONVERTER B
PRESENT and
Enabled
PRESENT and
Disabled*
ABSENT
PRESENT and enabled No alarm Minor alarm No alarm
PRESENT and disabled Minor alarm Major alarm,
Minor alarm and
GTR alarm
Major alarm,
Minor alarm and
GTR alarm
ABSENT No alarm Major alarm,
Minor alarm and
GTR alarm
Major alarm,
Minor alarm and
GTR alarm
* Disabled means that the converter no long supplies + 5 V power whether it is switched off or
in a failure condition.
These faults generate alarms with no time delay which light the corresponding LEDs, including
the central office alarms. The transmission of a notification on the auxiliary interface is
conditioned by the presence of at least one enabled converter.
Power Converter failure troubleshooting
- check for nominal voltage of the power source,
- set the switch to the "Off" position and remove the Card,
- check the fuse condition on the Power Converter Card or Cards,
- if necessary, replace the Power Converter Card,
- set the switch to the 'On" position and check that voltages are equal to +5 V and -5 V.
If a second Power Converter Card is not added in the course of this procedure, FMX operates
from backup.
Reminder : The presence of 2w2B1Q cards with active remote power feed, requires the use
of a P3 type power converter.
The absence of 53V voltages at converter output also generates the lighting of
the Fail LED. This alarm is processed like the + 5V alarm.
NOTE: Following a shelf power failure, the logs (events, performance, unavailability) are
erased. Nevertheless, the last ten registers are saved and the duration of the power
failure is indicated in a register of the events memory.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-13
-48V battery Power Converter and 110/230V mains supply (FMX4) shelf)
Power supply to FMX4 type shelves cannot be protected. Power converter presence cannot be
detected.
4.2.3.4 CT Log-on Failure
The CT is connected to the system, but it cannot log on to it.
1 - Illegible characters are displayed on screen:
- check the GIE-S Card fuse condition. Replace if necessary.
2 - Operate the GIE-S Card front panel switch back and forth repeatedly to check for any
effects on the Card.
3 - Check the CT connection
---> upon log-on completion, check the cable connecting the CT to the system. If
necessary, connect the terminal to the modem interface on the panel after setting
the GIE-S Card front panel switch to the appropriate position,
---> upon failure to log on, refer to the GIE-S Card start-up procedure described below.
GIE-S Card start-up procedure
The GIE-S Card has been fitted after the other common equipment units. The CT has been
connected to the system, but cannot log on to it.
- remove the GIE-S Card, then plug it in again after a few seconds,
---> the Mj Alm LED only is lit: Check the GIE-S Card fuse condition,
---> all GIE-S Card LEDs are lit. Replace the GIE-S Card,
---> LEDs are also lit on other equipment cards. Check the COB Card fuse condition.
---> the Mj Alm (or Mn Alm) LED lights up, then goes off. Check for a watchdog fault on the
GIE-S Card.
GIE-S card start-up may be performed in the following different ways:
- cold start,
- hot start,
- start-up following a restart control order.
Each type of start-up has particular consequences which are described below.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-14
GIE-S Card Cold Start-up
GIE-S card cold start-up which occurs on card power-up is independent of the other equipment
units.
The GIE-S card:
- initiates a self-test phase to check its physical resources,
- obtains knowledge of the presence of the COB (or COB-B) card(s),
- acquires the description of the COB (or COB-B) card which has a not empty description in
is standby memory.
NOTE: - At the end of the standby condition, the COB (or COB-B) card asks the port cards
to notify their faults and loopbacks.
- If none of the COB cards has a description, the COB (or COB-B) cards acquire the
description of the GIE-S card saved in the memory.
GIE (or GIE P) Card Hot Start-up
GIE-S card hot start-up only occurs following a software error or the dropping of the
watchdog.
In this case:
- the GIE-S card restarts with its unaltered data,
- the memories generated by the GIE-S card remain intact,
- settings and alarms in progress are maintained,
- operating sessions opened on the different interfaces are closed.
Start-up Following a Reset Control Order
The reset control order is initiated by the operator to reset the GIE-S card without switching off
the power.
The reset control order causes:
- the resetting of all data relative to the description (except the date and time),
- the deactivation of the remote control orders,
- the erasure of the events, performance and unavailability memories,
- the cancellation of the loopbacks and alarms in progress,
- the closure of all operating sessions opened on the different interfaces.
Start-up After a Restart Control Order
The restart control order is initiated by the operator to generate a cold startup of the GIE-S card
(Card removal/insertion).
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-15
The restart control order:
- positions the remote controls to their respective initial states,
- erases the events, performance and unavailability memories (only the last 10 registers are
saved),
- cancels the loopbacks and alarms in progress,
- closes all the operating sessions opened on the different interfaces.
GIE-S and COB (or COB-B) Card Watchdog Fault
The GIE-S and COB (or COB-B) cards are protected by a watchdog which allows a problem
linked to the card microprocessors to be detected. The watchdog causes a card restart and re-
initiates the microprocessor, and as a result, the activation of the major, minor and TNM alarms.
The "Mn Alm" or "Mj Alm" LEDs light up, then go off again after a short time, as a result of a
particular operator action, or in a periodical or reproducible manner. Check that the failure is not
caused by a watchdog fault on the GIE-S Card microprocessor and the COB (or COB-B) Card.
If the "Mj Alm" and "Mn Alm" LEDs light up alternately, the failure is due to the GIE-S Card
watchdog.
If the problem persists, change the GIE-S card then the COB (or COB-B) card.
4.2.3.5 Alarm Analysis on Common Equipment Units
Detection of a fault or error on a common equipment unit causes an appropriate message to be
transmitted, or a front panel LED to light up as follows:
COB and COB-B Cards
- LED: refer to Sub-section 4.2.2.1,
- error messages.
GIE-S Cards
- "Mj Alm" or "Mn Alm" LEDs: refer to Sub-sections 4.2.2.1,
- error messages.
For both cards, in the presence of an error message notified on the CT or RMS obtained from
the alarm list function, the operator may replace the card involved if the alarm persists.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-16
4.2.3.6 Alarm Analysis on Port Cards
The faults and errors detected on port cards can be of two types:
- "card" level faults and errors including:
. card out of rack,
. card power failure,
. watchdog fault, where applicable,
. replacement with a different card,
. connection error,
. failed self-tests (2 Mbps Multiuse Card, ...),
- "port" level faults and errors (they are summarized for each type of card in Volume 2).
If the card (or port) alarms have not been disabled, any fault or error is detected by the ASAE
Card and causes an alarm to be transmitted: CONTINUOUS PRINT message, major alarm or
minor alarm, depending on the configuration.
The various port card faults and errors are listed in the following tables. On the basis of the
corresponding port card front panel LED conditions or error messages, they enable the operator
to:
- isolate the fault and identify its cause,
- take corrective action.
REMINDER: Any loopback procedure causes the link to be interrupted in both directions of
transmission.
4.2.4 Card Replacement Procedure
When a card has to be replaced, follow the procedures below as specified for each type of card.
REMINDER
Equipment cards are stored in anti-static packaging.
The person handling them must take
the required precautionary measures.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-17
4.2.4.1 Replacing a Common Equipment Card
GIE-S Card
Do not switch off power
This allows service in terms of data cross-connect to be maintained. Nevertheless, certain
functions such as:
- switching from one COB (or COB-B) card to another,
- generating information intended for the operator (CT or RMS),
- generating alarms and logs,
- auxiliary communication (CT or RMS),
- equipment power-up,
are no longer performed.
1 Remove the defective card.
2 Check the fuse
if necessary, replace and plug-in the card again (step 4)
3 On the new card:
set the link options to the same position as those on the card removed.
4 Plug in the card,
5 On GIE-S card start-up (software initialization phase) the data memorized in the COB (or
COB-B) card standby memory are recopied in the GIE-S card back-up memory.
6 Reset FMX time.
NOTE: When an CT is connected to the FMX, the start-up operation generates messages.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-18
COB (or COB-B) Card
The COB (or COB-B) card may be removed or inserted when the equipment is powered. Due to
the possible protection of the COB (or COB-B) card, several cases are possible.
Protected operation - removal of active COB card
The removal of the active COB card causes a switching of service to the standby COB
(or COB-B) card (the card becomes active). The following events occur:
- card absent fault generated following the removal of the active COB (or COB-B) card,
- all traffic switched onto the standby COB (or COB-B) card,
- traffic fully restored,
- chain fault fault generated.
NOTE: Operation is no longer protected.
The switching events are memorized in the events memory and are systematically
notified.
Do not switch off power
2 Check the fuse
If necessary, replace and plug-in the card again (step 4)
3 On the new card:
check the position of the link options.
4 Plug in the card. The physical composition is updated.
5 On COB (or COB-B) card start-up (software initialization phase) the standby memory of the
newly inserted COB (or COB-B) card is updated and takes on the role of the standby COB
(or COB-B) card.
6 Check test results.
Protected operation - standby COB (or COB-B) card Removal
The removal of the standby COB (or COB-B) card generates a fault. Operation is no longer
protected and no switching is possible.
COB (or COB-B) card insertion causes:
- the updating of the physical composition,
- the updating of the newly inserted COB card standby memory which takes on the role of the
standby COB (or COB-B) card,
- the fault due to card removal disappears.
Unprotected Operation
COB card removal causes a service interruption and generates a fault.
Inserting the COB (or COB-B) card in the location of the previous one updates the physical
composition. Reboot the shelf. The COB (or COB-B) card is reprogrammed on the basis of the
logical configuration by the GIE-S GIE-S card. Service is restored.
4 - MAINTENANCE
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-19
4.2.4.2 Replacing a Port Card
During operation, when a port card is removed from the shelf, the common equipment units
detect the absence of the card after a transient phase due to the equipment. As soon as card
absence is detected, the card is declared absent and the common equipment units insert the
absent card code in the connections in service. Furthermore, the common equipment units
generate the absent card fault which possibly generates an alarm.
Depending on masking status, the fault is notified to the local CT (RMS). The connections
created by the operator still exist.
Do not switch off power.
1 Disable card alarms if so desired.
Disable the connections.
3 Check the fuse:
if necessary, replace it and plug the card back in.
4 Replace the defective card.
5 Insert a new card. The FMX 264 analyzes the information of this "new" card and compares it
with that of the "previous" card which was declared in this location in the physical
description. The following two cases are possible:
- the "new" card is different from the "previous" one (the comparison is run on card
type):
The common equipment units generate the "Card different" fault. If the operator wants the
new card to be applied, the previous card must be deleted from he physical description.
This results in the elimination of the connections transiting through the card and of the
"different card" faults. The operator must program the "new" card.
- the "new" card is identical to the "previous" card (the comparison is run on card
type) :
The FMX programs the "new" card with the parameters of the "previous" card : the "Card
Out" fault disappears and service is restored to the way it was prior to removal.
6 Check that initialization and self-test where applicable (2 Mbps Multiuse...) have been
successful (see Volume 2).
* In the case of port cards, self-test is only performed on card power-up.
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page 4-20
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-1
GLOSSARY
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-2
G.
GLOSSARY
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-3
Active operations port
Operations port from which the operator can enter commands intended for FMX. They consist
of the "Loc" port and the "Modem". The active operations port is selected via an GIE-S Card
front panel switch.
Active synchronization source
Clock source from which the COB Card derives system synchronization (nominal or standby
clock sources).
Backup
Operation consisting, during GIE-S Card start-up, in resuming operation from active
configuration data stored in the backup memory. Data is copied in the back-up memory of the
COB card.
Backup memory
Memory area or package located on the GIE-S Card, the contents of which may be backed by a
battery, even if the Card is no longer powered.
Backward/Forward
In the direction of transmission of interest, backward and forward equipment is located before
and after local equipment, respectively.
Card out code
Code added into TSs supporting connections configured as "Active" when one of the port cards
is not in the rack.
Common Equipment units (CEU)
FMX common equipment units: all GIE-S, COB and Converter Cards.
Configuration Data
See "Logic Configuration".
Connection
This term defines the path used inside FMX via a link. Adding a connection means adding a
relation between port TSs (or bits) and specifying characteristics. For traffic to be handled, the
connection must be configured as active by the operator. When the connection has been
configured as inactive by the operator, traffic is logically interrupted.
A connection is defined by at least two ports, a bit rate and in the case of a framed port by a
selected TS group. A connection is either two-way (transmitter port, receiver port), or distributed
(transmitter port and more than one receiver ports).
Connections Description
Data entered by the operator relative to the connections to be set up.
Physical Description
Data entered by the operator describing the physical ressources selected. The data concerns
the shelves and cards.
GLOSSARY
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-4
Consecutive TS Integrity in a Frame
An N x 64 kbps connection preserves consecutive TS integrity in a frame if for each
transmission direction all the data TSs of the same incoming frame are found in the same order
in the same outgoing frame.
Disabled / Enabled
Refers to a card or a port for which alarms have been disabled or enabled by the operator. In
case of disabling, detected faults and error conditions are not processed by common equipment
units and therefore do not initiate any alarm.
Equipment Composition
The physical composition corresponds to the physical reality of equipment units installed.
General Parameters
Information entered by the operator characterizing the equipment.
Idle code for connections configured as inactive
The data code is also the unused TS code; the signalling code is specific to the connection.
Link
Path used between two subscribers regardless of the equipment units used.
Logic configuration
Unites all the information on functional ressources and their associated parameters; general
system parameters, physical description and associated parameters, description of
connections, equipment synchronization, protected operation.
MMI Session
The operator can only change the system parameters if a Man-Machine Interface session (MMI)
has been opened.
Monitoring Status
Filter associated with a card, a port or shelf which controls alarm visibility for a given control
access interface. Two filtering levels are defined:
- filtering concerning the contribution of local alarms (LEDs, loops) and notification messages to
the local interface (LT); this filtering is called masking,
- filtering of notification messages to TMN interface (Q interface) (this function is not
implemented).
Nominal synchronization source
Synchronization source selected by the operator to synchronize the system in normal mode of
operation.
GLOSSARY
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-5
Port
Physical interface port differing from a card in that the latter can support various ports. A port is
defined by traffic type and range of bit rates.
Port card
Plug-in unit forming part of the FMX Digital Cross-connect System and supporting one or more
ports. A card is deemed to be fitted in an allocated slot if common equipment units can detect it
in that slot. The card is deemed to be out of the rack if it is removed and/or replaced with
another card type or with a "different".
Port card characteristics
Port card information known by common equipment units. They include essentially card type
and, where applicable, mode of operation and configuration parameters, port bit rate, card
software version. Cards can be single-port (e.g.: 2MU), same type multi-port (e.g.: 3 64 I Card),
or different type multi-port (e.g.: 2w2B1Q).
SbMux
Subscriber multiplexer providing management of local subscriber loops.
Scrolling
Dialog mode in which all menu lines are accessible only after pressing the arrow keys.
Securisation
Operation consisting, during GIE-S Card start-up, in resuming operation from securisation
memory. Data is copied onto the back-up memory.
Securisation memory
Memory area or package located on the COB Card and containing a copy of system, "physical"
configuration, and active configuration data.
Shelf
Physical unit containing plug-in cards.
Slot
Location in which an equipment card is fitted. On first system power-up, port card slots have an
"empty" logic status. A slot is allocated as soon as a card is declared by the operator in this
location, even in the absence of a card in the shelf.
StMux
Station multiplexer providing management of inter-office links.
Start-up
GIE-S Card "start-up" is the software starting phase, during which backup or protection
operations are carried out.
GLOSSARY
TM - 252938358-A
Volume 1
Page G-6
Unused TS code
Defined on a per slot basis, data idle codes and signalling idle codes are added, in the card
transmission direction, into TSs unused for connections.
V24 - Definition of interchange circuits
Circuit Abbreviation Signification
101 Gnd Protective ground
102 Sig Gnd Signal ground or common return
103 TD Transmit Data
104 RD Received Data
105 RTS Request To Send
106 CTS Clear To Send
107 DSR Data Set Ready
108/2 DTR Data Terminal Ready
109 Data carrier detect (on data channel)
Sige social : 27, rue Leblanc - 75512 PARIS CEDEX 15 - FRANCE
Tl. : +33 1 58 11 77 00 - Fax : +33 1 58 11 77 50
http://www.sagem.com
Socit Anonyme au capital de 300 272 000 - 480 108 158 RCS Paris

252938358-01 T1

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

252938358-01 T1

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SAGEM FMX

Potrebbero piacerti anche